WO2025146043A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents
Communication method and apparatus Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2025146043A1 WO2025146043A1 PCT/CN2024/144377 CN2024144377W WO2025146043A1 WO 2025146043 A1 WO2025146043 A1 WO 2025146043A1 CN 2024144377 W CN2024144377 W CN 2024144377W WO 2025146043 A1 WO2025146043 A1 WO 2025146043A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- terminal
- information
- network
- network element
- multiple connections
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
- H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
- H04W36/0011—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off for data sessions of end-to-end connection
- H04W36/0027—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off for data sessions of end-to-end connection for a plurality of data sessions of end-to-end connections, e.g. multi-call or multi-bearer end-to-end data connections
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
- H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
- H04W36/0055—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W76/00—Connection management
- H04W76/10—Connection setup
- H04W76/15—Setup of multiple wireless link connections
Definitions
- the present application relates to the field of communications, and in particular to a communication method and device.
- a communication method is provided, which is applied to a data management network element, including: when a terminal does not establish multiple connections, the data management network element obtains indication information and sends the indication information to the terminal.
- the indication information is used to indicate that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, and the multiple connections refer to establishing multiple third generation partnership project 3GPP access type connections at the same time, and the 3GPP access type connections belong to the same or different networks.
- the terminal can trigger the establishment of multiple 3GPP access type connections at the same time according to the indication information, that is, simultaneously access and register to multiple networks to meet the terminal's more flexible communication needs.
- the method described in the first aspect may further include: the data management network element obtains indication information from the application function.
- the multiple networks indicated by the network list do not include the network currently accessed by the terminal, so as to avoid the terminal continuing to select the network currently accessed by the terminal, resulting in failure of establishing multiple connections.
- the network list also indicates the types of wireless access technologies supported by the terminals for contracting in multiple networks. These wireless access technology types may be different.
- the wireless access technology type supported by PLMN#2 is TN
- the wireless access technology type supported by PLMN#3 is TN and NTN
- the wireless access technology type supported by PLMN#4 is NTN.
- the wireless access technology type supported by PLMN#2 is 5G
- the wireless access technology type supported by PLMN#3 is 5G and 6G
- the wireless access technology type supported by PLMN#4 is 6G, etc., to avoid failure in establishing multiple connections due to unsupported wireless access technology types.
- the data management network element obtains the indication information, including: the data management network element receives the capability information of the terminal, and obtains the indication information according to the capability information of the terminal.
- the capability information of the terminal is used to indicate that the terminal supports multiple connections, so as to avoid instructing the terminal to establish multiple connections because the terminal does not support multiple connections, resulting in a waste of communication resources.
- the data management network element obtains the contract data of the terminal, including: during the terminal registration process, the data management network element receives a contract data acquisition request message from the access and mobility management network element, and obtains the contract data of the terminal according to the contract data acquisition request message.
- the contract data acquisition request message is used to request the data of the contract between the terminal and the network; that is, the existing registration process is reused to realize the perception of the contract data of the terminal, or it can also be realized through a newly defined process, which is decoupled from the existing process, and the information element transmission can be more flexible.
- the data management network element obtains indication information, including: the data management network element can obtain indication information according to preset conditions, wherein the preset conditions include at least one of the following: the terminal is currently within the time period where multiple connections need to be established, or the terminal is located in the area where the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, that is, the data management network element can decide on its own to trigger the establishment of multiple connections based on the current time and the current location of the terminal, thereby avoiding additional communication overhead caused by interaction with other network elements.
- the preset conditions include at least one of the following: the terminal is currently within the time period where multiple connections need to be established, or the terminal is located in the area where the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, that is, the data management network element can decide on its own to trigger the establishment of multiple connections based on the current time and the current location of the terminal, thereby avoiding additional communication overhead caused by interaction with other network elements.
- the data management network element obtains the indication information, including: the data management network element receives request information from the terminal, and obtains the indication information according to the request information.
- the request information is used to indicate that the terminal requests to establish multiple connections, that is, the establishment of multiple connections can be triggered by the terminal itself, so that the interaction between the terminal and the network side in the process of triggering the establishment of multiple connections is simpler, and the communication overhead can be smaller.
- the data management network element receives request information from the terminal, including: the data management network element receives a contract data management acquisition request message from the access and mobility management network element, wherein the contract data management acquisition request message includes request information, that is, it is implemented by reusing existing signaling, or it can also be implemented through a newly defined process, which is decoupled from the existing process, and the signal element transmission can be more flexible.
- the data management network element obtains the indication information, including: the data management network element obtains the slice information and/or data network name corresponding to the session of the terminal, and obtains the indication information according to whether the service of the terminal needs to establish multiple connections.
- the slice information and/or data network name corresponds to the service of the terminal, that is, multiple connections can also be established according to the service requirements of the terminal to achieve on-demand establishment and avoid redundancy.
- the data management network element obtains the slice information and/or data network name corresponding to the session of the terminal, including: during the session establishment process of the terminal, the data management network element receives a context registration request message from the session management network element, wherein the context registration request message includes the slice information and/or the data network name, that is, it is implemented by reusing existing signaling in the session establishment process, or it can also be implemented through a newly defined process, which is decoupled from the existing process and the cell transmission can be more flexible.
- the data management network element may determine that the current network cannot meet the service requirements of the terminal.
- the current network can only provide part of the slices requested by the terminal, or the service requested by the terminal cannot be provided by the current network.
- the non-public network NPN cannot provide Internet protocol (IP) multimedia service (IMS) services.
- IP Internet protocol
- IMS multimedia service
- the data management network element triggers the establishment of multiple connections to meet the network requirements of the terminal's services.
- a communication method is provided, which is applied to an application function network element, including: the application function network element receives a request message, and sends a response message according to the request message.
- the request message is used to request the application function network element to provide a network that can be used to establish multiple connections, and multiple connections refer to establishing multiple third generation partnership project 3GPP access type connections at the same time, and the 3GPP access type connections belong to the same or different networks;
- the response message includes a network list, and the multiple networks indicated by the network list are networks that can be used to establish multiple connections.
- the application function network element may specifically be a roaming handover application function SOR-AF network element, or any other possible type of AF network element, and there is no limitation on this.
- the method described in the second aspect may also include: the application function network element receives the slice information and/or data network name corresponding to the session of the terminal, and determines the network list based on multiple networks that support the slice information and/or data network name.
- the multiple networks indicated by the network list do not include a network currently accessed by the terminal.
- the network list further indicates the types of wireless access technologies subscribed by the terminal supported by the multiple networks.
- a communication method is provided, which is applied to an access and mobility management network element, including: the access and mobility management network element sends service information to a data management network element, receives indication information from the data management network element based on the service information, and sends indication information to a terminal.
- the service information indicates that the service demand of the terminal is not met; the indication information is used to indicate that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, and multiple connections refer to establishing multiple third generation partnership project 3GPP access type connections at the same time, and the 3GPP access type connections belong to the same or different networks.
- the method described in the third aspect may further include: the access and mobility management network element receives an N2 message from the access network device, the N2 message including service information.
- the access and mobility management network element determines, based on the service information, that the access network device cannot meet the service requirements of the terminal.
- the method described in the third aspect may further include: the access and mobility management network element obtains service information according to the terminal being located in a low signal area, wherein the service information is specifically used to indicate that the signal quality of the terminal cannot meet the signal quality requirements of the terminal's service.
- a communication method which can be executed by a terminal, or by a module (such as a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) applied to the terminal, and can also be implemented by a logical node, a logical module or software that can implement all or part of the terminal functions.
- the method includes: receiving indication information, and establishing multiple connections according to the indication information.
- the indication information is used to indicate that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, and multiple connections refer to establishing multiple third-generation partnership project 3GPP access type connections at the same time, and the 3GPP access type connections belong to the same or different networks.
- the terminal has established a 3GPP access type connection with the first network
- the establishing multiple connections according to the indication information includes: selecting a second network from multiple networks indicated by a network list according to the indication information, and establishing a 3GPP access type connection with the second network.
- the multiple networks indicated by the network list are networks that can be used to establish multiple connections.
- the multiple networks indicated by the network list do not include the first network.
- the network list further indicates the types of wireless access technologies subscribed by the terminal supported by the multiple networks.
- the indication information is also used to indicate a network list.
- a communication device comprising: a processor, the processor being coupled to a memory, the processor being configured to execute instructions stored in the memory, so that the communication device executes the method described in any one of the first to sixth aspects.
- the wireless access technology type combination can be a combination of more wireless access technology types, such as TN+TN+TN, or TN+TN+NTN, or NTN+NTN+NTN, or 4G+5G+6G, or 5G+6G+satellite, etc., which can be arbitrarily combined according to actual needs, and so on, and will not be repeated.
- the decoupling of access resources can be achieved, that is, connections of different wireless access technology types use different network resources to avoid the use of the same wireless access technology type and cause network resource shortages.
- the data management network element carries it in the above-mentioned request message and sends it to the application function network element, or may also be sent to the application function network element through other messages, without limitation.
- the application function network element can also receive the slice information and/or data network name corresponding to the terminal session. Then, the application function network element can also determine the network list based on the multiple networks that support the slice information and/or data network name.
- the terminal can be configured to use the local network list to select multiple networks (or select additional networks) to establish multiple connections only when the indication information is received. Otherwise, it should be processed according to the logic of the prior art.
- Method 2 The terminal can send the information of the terminal's slice to the network.
- the data management network element can obtain the slice information requested by the terminal, and obtain the relevant information of the multi-connection according to the slice corresponding to the multi-connection service of the network slice.
- the slice information requested by the terminal can also be reported to the network through the registration process.
- the terminal can send a registration request message carrying the slice information requested by the terminal to the access and mobility management network element.
- the registration type carried in the registration request message can also refer to the relevant introduction of the above-mentioned method 1, which will not be repeated here.
- the access and mobility management network element can report the terminal's capability information to the data management network element when registering the context of the terminal to the data management network element.
- the data management network element can receive a context registration request message from the access and mobility management network element, and the context registration request message includes the slice information requested by the terminal, that is, the existing registration process is reused to realize the perception of the terminal's multi-connection needs, or it can also be realized through a newly defined process, which is decoupled from the existing process, and the information element transmission can be more flexible.
- the data management network element may obtain the contract data of the terminal, and obtain relevant information of the multiple connections based on the contract data.
- the data management network element can obtain the contract data of the terminal during the registration process of the terminal.
- the access and mobility management network element can send a contract data acquisition request message to the data management network element to request the data of the terminal contracted with the network.
- the data management network element can receive the contract data acquisition request message from the access and mobility management network element, and obtain the contract data of the terminal according to the contract data acquisition request message.
- the service information is used to indicate that the service demand of the terminal is not met, such as the bandwidth provided by the network currently connected by the terminal (which can be understood as a network without special instructions) cannot meet the service demand of the terminal for bandwidth, and/or the signal quality of the terminal cannot meet the service demand of the terminal for signal quality, or there may be any other possible situations, which are not limited to this.
- the network currently connected by the terminal needs to trigger the establishment of multiple connections to provide additional network resources to meet the service demand of the terminal.
- the service information can be a bitmap of multiple bits, so as to indicate various situations in which the service demand of the terminal is not met through different value combinations of the bitmap.
- the access network device when the access network device determines that the bandwidth that it can provide to the terminal cannot meet the bandwidth demand of the terminal's service, the access network device can send an N2 message to the access and mobility management network element.
- the N2 message includes service information, which indicates that the bandwidth provided by the network currently accessed by the terminal cannot meet the bandwidth demand of the terminal's service.
- the access and mobility management network element can receive the N2 message from the access network device and send the service information to the data management network element.
- the service information can be carried in any possible message exchanged between the access and mobility management network element and the data management network element.
- the access network device may not perceive the total bandwidth demand of the terminal.
- the access network device can report the bandwidth that the current access network device can provide to the access and mobility management network element.
- the access and mobility management network element can calculate the difference between the total bandwidth demand of the terminal and the bandwidth that can be met currently, which is the additional bandwidth provided to the terminal.
- the access and mobility management network element can perform mobility management on the terminal to determine whether the terminal has moved to a low signal area.
- the low signal area can be pre-configured in the access and mobility management network element.
- the low signal area can be an area with cell granularity, such as containing one or more cells, which can be represented by the cell identifier, or the low signal area can also be an area defined by longitude and latitude information, which is not limited.
- the access and mobility management network element can obtain service information based on the terminal being located in the low signal area, such as obtaining pre-configured service information locally or generating service information locally, and send the service information to the data management network element.
- the service information can be carried in any possible message exchanged between the access and mobility management network element and the data management network element to indicate that the signal quality of the terminal cannot meet the signal quality requirements of the terminal's service.
- the access and mobility management network element can also combine the service information reported by the access network device when obtaining service information.
- the service information reported by the access network device indicates that the bandwidth provided by the access network device to the terminal cannot meet the bandwidth requirements of the terminal's service, and at this time the access and mobility management network element also determines that the terminal has moved to a low signal area.
- the access and mobility management network element can generate service information indicating that the bandwidth provided by the network currently accessed by the terminal cannot meet the bandwidth requirements of the terminal's service, and the signal quality of the terminal cannot meet the signal quality requirements of the terminal's service.
- the data management network element When the data management network element obtains the service information, the data management network element can obtain the indication information based on the service information and the terminal has not established multiple connections.
- the specific acquisition method can refer to the relevant introduction of the above method 1, which will not be repeated here.
- the access and mobility management network element may also be replaced by a session management network element, such as a session management network element in the network currently accessed by the terminal.
- the session management network element may subscribe to the access and mobility management network element for the bandwidth provided by the network currently accessed by the terminal.
- the access and mobility management network element may obtain the bandwidth provided by the network currently accessed by the terminal from the access network device according to the subscription of the session management network element, and return it to the session management network element through a subscription response.
- the above is an introduction to whether the network can meet the business needs by taking bandwidth and/or location as an example, and it is not a limitation. Whether the network can meet the business needs may also have other implementations, such as whether the transmission delay of the business on the network side meets the requirements of the business transmission delay, whether the queuing waiting time of the data packets of the business meets the requirements of the queuing waiting time of the data packets of the business, etc. In other words, any parameter that can be used to characterize whether the business needs can be met by the network can be applied to the embodiments of the present application.
- Mode 5 The data management network element can obtain indication information according to preset conditions.
- the preset conditions can be pre-configured locally in the data management network element, and may specifically include at least one of the following: the terminal is currently within the time period where multiple connections need to be established, or the terminal is located within the area where the terminal needs to establish multiple connections. That is, the data management network element can decide on its own to trigger the terminal to establish multiple connections based on the current time and the current location of the terminal, thereby avoiding the additional overhead caused by interacting with other network elements.
- the time period during which the terminal needs to establish multiple connections is similar to the preset time period indicated by the above-mentioned time policy, and can be used as a reference for understanding. Therefore, when the current time is the start time of the preset time period and the terminal has not currently established multiple connections, the data management network element can obtain the indication information.
- the specific acquisition method can refer to the relevant introduction of the above-mentioned method 1, which will not be repeated here.
- the preset time period is the time period from t1 to t2 after the start time of each cycle, such as 18:00-22:00 every day, that is, the time period frequently used by users.
- the data management network element can obtain the indication information and execute the subsequent process of the embodiment of the present application to trigger the terminal to establish multiple connections to ensure the user's service experience within the time period. Afterwards, when the current time is 22:00, the data management network element can instruct the terminal to release multiple connections to reduce communication overhead and facilitate terminal energy saving.
- the area where the terminal needs to establish multiple connections is similar to the preset area indicated by the above-mentioned location strategy. If it is the above-mentioned low-signal area, you can refer to it for understanding.
- the data management network element obtains the location of the terminal from the access and mobility management network element related to the terminal (or the access and mobility management network element serving the terminal) through a subscription service, or the location of the terminal can be obtained by other means, such as the access network device reporting to the data management network element through the access and mobility management network element.
- the specific selection can be based on actual needs, and there is no specific restriction on this. In this way, when the terminal currently moves to the preset area and the terminal has not currently established multiple connections, the data management network element can obtain the indication information.
- the specific acquisition method can refer to the relevant introduction of the above-mentioned method 1, which will not be repeated here.
- Mode 6 The terminal sends the slice information and/or data network name corresponding to the terminal's session to the network.
- the data management network element can obtain the slice information and/or data network name corresponding to the terminal's session, and obtain relevant information about multiple connections based on whether the terminal's service requires the establishment of multiple connections.
- the slice information and/or data network name can correspond to the terminal's service.
- the slice information and/or data network name corresponding to the terminal's session can be reported to the network through the session establishment process.
- the terminal in the process of establishing a session with the terminal, can send a PDU session establishment request message carrying the slice information and/or the data network name to the access and mobility management network element.
- the access and mobility management network element can select a session management network element, and send the slice information and/or the data network name to the session management network element through a PDU session creation session context request message.
- the session management network element can report the slice information and/or the data network name to the data management network element when registering the session context of the terminal with the data management network element.
- the data management network element receives a context registration request message from the session management network element, and the context registration request message may include slice information and/or the data network name.
- the data management network element can determine the service corresponding to the slice information and/or data network name in the context registration request message according to the correspondence between the slice information or the data network name and the service.
- one implementation method is: the data management network element can determine whether the service is a service that requires multiple connections, such as an XRM service, or any other possible type of service. If the service is a multi-connection service, such as an XRM service, and the terminal has not currently established multiple connections, the data management network element can obtain the indication information.
- the specific acquisition method can refer to the relevant introduction of the above-mentioned method 1, which will not be repeated here.
- the data management network element can determine whether the demand for the service is met, such as initiating a subscription to the access and mobility management network element or the session management network element to determine whether the bandwidth provided by the network currently accessed by the terminal can meet the bandwidth demand of the service.
- the specific implementation can also refer to the relevant introduction of the above-mentioned method 5.
- the data management network element can obtain the indication information.
- the specific acquisition method can refer to the relevant introduction of the above-mentioned method 1, which will not be repeated here.
- the data management network element may determine that the current network cannot meet the service requirements of the terminal. For example, the current network can only provide part of the slice requested by the terminal, or the service requested by the terminal cannot be provided by the current network. For example, NPN cannot provide IMS services. In the scenario where the UE accesses NPN, an additional PLMN can be selected to obtain IMS services. In this case, the data management network element triggers the establishment of multiple connections to meet the network requirements of the terminal's services.
- Mode 7 When the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, the terminal can send request information to the network.
- the data management network element can receive the request information from the terminal and obtain relevant information of the multiple connections according to the request information.
- the request information is used to indicate that the terminal requests to establish multiple connections, that is, the establishment of multiple connections can be triggered by the terminal itself, so that the interaction between the terminal and the network side is simpler and the communication overhead can be smaller.
- the terminal can provide the user with the function of turning on or off multiple connections.
- the terminal provides a user interaction interface for multiple connections, and the user interaction interface is provided with a button to turn on or off multiple connections. The user can choose to turn on or off the function of multiple connections by clicking the button.
- the terminal can provide an interface for selecting a network mode. On this interface, if the user selects the network model as multiple networks, it means turning on the function of multiple connections.
- the user selects the network model as a single network, it means turning off the function of multiple connections. At this time, it is necessary to release multiple connections and establish a single connection.
- the function of users turning on or off multiple connections can also be implemented in other ways, which is not limited by this application.
- the terminal can respond to the user operation and send request information to the network, such as sending a UL NAS message carrying the request information to the access and mobility management network element.
- the access and mobility management network element can send request information to the data management network element, such as sending a contract data acquisition request message carrying the request information.
- the data management network element can receive request information from the terminal, such as receiving a contract data acquisition request message carrying the request information, that is, by reusing existing signaling, or it can also be implemented through a newly defined process, which is decoupled from the existing process and the information element transmission can be more flexible.
- the data management network element can obtain the indication information based on the request information.
- the specific acquisition method can refer to the relevant introduction of the above method 1, which will not be repeated here.
- method 1 is implemented in combination with method 2, and the data management network element can obtain indication information when the terminal supports multiple connections and the network slice requested by the terminal is the network slice corresponding to the multi-connection service.
- method 1 is implemented in combination with method 3, and the data management network element can obtain indication information when the terminal supports multiple connections and the terminal has signed a contract for a multi-connection service.
- method 1, method 3 and method 3 are implemented in combination, and the data management network element can obtain indication information when the terminal supports multiple connections, the network slice requested by the terminal is the network slice corresponding to the multi-connection service, and the terminal has signed a contract for a multi-connection service.
- the data management network element may send indication information to the terminal through the SOR process.
- the data management network element sends a contract data acquisition response message carrying the indication information to the access and mobility management network element.
- the access and mobility management network element receives the indication information from the data management network element, such as the contract data acquisition response message carrying the indication information, and the access and mobility management network element may carry the indication information in the registration acceptance message and then send it to the terminal.
- the data management network element sends a contract data acquisition response message carrying the indication information to the access and mobility management network element.
- the access and mobility management network element may send the indication information to the terminal through the DL NAS transmission container.
- the terminal can also access the second network according to the type of wireless access technology subscribed by the terminal supported by the second network indicated in the network list, such as NT access or NTN access.
- the terminal can also have other ways to obtain the network list.
- the terminal can dynamically build a network list locally.
- the terminal obtains a network selection list in advance, and the network selection list can be an existing list, such as that obtained through the process defined in the above "3. Steering of roaming (SOR)".
- the above-mentioned indication information sent by the network to the terminal can be the type of wireless access technology supported by multiple connections, or the type of wireless access technology supported by the second network.
- the terminal can select a network that supports the type of wireless access technology from the network selection list, and use these networks to construct the network list in the embodiment of the present application.
- Fig. 9 is a flow chart of the communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
- the UDM the above-mentioned data management network element
- the UE the above-mentioned terminal
- the registration request message can carry the UE capability information (such as the capability information of the above-mentioned terminal) to indicate whether the UE supports multiple connections.
- the specific principle can also refer to the relevant introduction in the above-mentioned method 1, which will not be repeated here.
- AMF requests UDM to obtain the subscription data of the UE through a subscription data acquisition request message, which can trigger UDM to determine whether the UE is currently establishing multiple connections. For example, UDM can determine whether UDM stores one or more subscription data of the UE. If it is one subscription data of the UE, the subsequent process of the embodiment of the present application is continued, otherwise, UDM does not trigger the subsequent SOR process.
- S903 and S906 may also be executed together.
- UDM sends a SOR acquisition request message to SOR-AF (the above-mentioned application function network element).
- the UDM can verify the security of the network list. If the verification is successful, the subsequent process of the embodiment of the present application will continue. Otherwise, the process will fail.
- S907-S909 are optional processes, and the UDM network element can obtain the network list locally, or, when the UE is pre-configured with a network list, that is, when there is no need for the network to dynamically send the network list, S907-S909 are not executed.
- the subscription data acquisition response message may carry the subscription data of the UE and indication information, and the indication information may be used to indicate that the UE needs to establish multiple connections.
- the indication information may also include a network list.
- UDM sends a registration acceptance message to the UE.
- the registration accept message may be used to indicate that the UE has successfully registered with the network, and the registration accept message may also include the above-mentioned indication information.
- S910-S911 is the SOR process in the registration process, and the SOR information, such as the network list, is sent to the UE by reusing the message of the registration process.
- S912 UE establishes multiple connections.
- Fig. 10 is a flow chart of the communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
- the UDM the above-mentioned data management network element
- the UE the above-mentioned terminal
- the process of the communication method is as follows:
- UE sends a registration request message to AMF (the above-mentioned access and mobility management network element).
- AMF the above-mentioned access and mobility management network element
- the registration request message can carry the UE capability information (such as the capability information of the above-mentioned terminal) to indicate whether the UE supports multiple connections.
- the specific principle can also refer to the relevant introduction in the above-mentioned method 1, which will not be repeated here.
- AMF sends a register UE context request message to UDM.
- S1003 is the registration process that continues to be executed after S1002.
- the specific implementation principle can be found in the relevant introduction of the registration process defined by 3GPP, which will not be repeated here.
- the UDM can verify the security of the network list. If the verification is successful, the subsequent process of the embodiment of the present application will continue. Otherwise, the process will fail.
- the subscription data notification message may carry indication information, and the indication information may be used to indicate that the UE needs to establish multiple connections.
- the indication information may also include a network list.
- S1008-S1009 is the SOR process after the registration process, which implements sending the SOR information, such as the network list, to the UE.
- Fig. 11 is a fourth flow chart of the communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- the UDM the above-mentioned data management network element
- the UDM can trigger the sending of indication information to the UE according to the request of the UE (the above-mentioned terminal) to establish multiple connections.
- the process of the communication method is as follows:
- UL NAS messages can carry request information for the terminal to request the establishment of multiple connections.
- AMF sends a contract data acquisition request message to UDM.
- the contract signing data acquisition request message sent may carry the above request information.
- the SOR-AF sends a SOR acquisition response message to the UDM.
- the UDM can verify the security of the network list. If the verification is successful, the subsequent process of the embodiment of the present application will continue. Otherwise, the process will fail.
- S1105-S1107 are optional processes, and the UDM network element can obtain the network list locally, or, when the UE is pre-configured with a network list, that is, when there is no need for the network to dynamically send the network list, S1105-S1107 are not executed.
- the subscription data notification message may carry indication information, and the indication information may be used to indicate that the UE needs to establish multiple connections.
- the indication information may also include a network list.
- S1110 may refer to the related introduction of S803 above, which will not be repeated here.
- Fig. 12 is a flow chart 5 of the communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
- the UDM the above-mentioned data management network element
- the UE the above-mentioned terminal
- the process of the communication method is as follows:
- the session establishment process may be to execute S401 - S416b shown in FIG. 4 .
- S401 - S416b shown in FIG. 4 .
- FIG. 4 For details, please refer to the relevant introduction of FIG. 4 , which will not be described again.
- S1202 SMF sends a UE session context registration request (Nudm_UECM_Registration request) message to UDM.
- S1203 UDM sends a SOR acquisition request message to SOR-AF (the above-mentioned application function network element).
- the SOR-AF sends a SOR acquisition response message to the UDM.
- the SOR acquisition request message can be used to request the SOR-AF to provide a network that can be used to establish multiple connections.
- the SOR acquisition request message may also carry the S-NSSAI and/or DNN of the UE.
- the SOR acquisition request message may carry the above-mentioned network list. The specific principle can also be referred to the relevant introduction of the above-mentioned method 1, which will not be repeated here.
- the UDM can verify the security of the network list. If the verification is successful, the subsequent process of the embodiment of the present application will continue. Otherwise, the process will fail.
- the terminal can establish multiple connections with the network according to the instructions of the URSP rule (such as according to policy information or the terminal's own decision).
- the specific implementation principle is similar to that of S803 above, which can be understood by reference and will not be repeated here.
- the terminal can match the policy information and trigger the establishment of multiple connections when the service matches the policy information that requires the establishment of multiple connections, so as to ensure that the multiple connections can meet the needs of the service and ensure the user experience.
- the method may also include: when the policy information of the terminal needs to be updated, the policy control network element may obtain the new policy information of the terminal and send the new policy information to the terminal.
- the terminal may also receive policy information from the network and configure it locally in the terminal.
- the new policy information may be the above-mentioned enhanced URSP rule.
- the policy control network element may obtain the new policy information from the application function, or the new policy information may be manually configured to the policy control network element, which is not limited.
- Fig. 14 is a structural schematic diagram 1 of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- a communication device 1400 includes: a transceiver module 1401 and a processing module 1402.
- Fig. 14 only shows the main components of the communication device.
- the communication device 1400 may be applied to the data management network element in the above communication method to implement the functions of the data management network element, as follows.
- the processing module 1402 is used to obtain indication information when the terminal has not established multiple connections, and the transceiver module 1401 is used to send indication information to the terminal.
- the indication information is used to indicate that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, and the multiple connections refer to establishing multiple third generation partnership project 3GPP access type connections at the same time, and the 3GPP access type connections belong to the same or different networks.
- the transceiver module 1401 is also used to send slice information and/or data network name corresponding to the terminal session to the application function network element before obtaining indication information from the application function; the multiple networks indicated by the network list are networks that support slice information and/or data network names.
- the network list further indicates the types of wireless access technologies subscribed by the terminal supported by the multiple networks.
- the transceiver module 1401 is further configured to receive capability information of the terminal, and the processing module 1402 is further configured to obtain indication information according to the capability information of the terminal.
- the capability information of the terminal is used to indicate that the terminal supports multiple connections.
- the transceiver module 1401 is further configured to receive a subscription data acquisition request message from an access and mobility management network element during terminal registration, and the processing module 1402 is further configured to acquire the subscription data of the terminal according to the subscription data acquisition request message.
- the subscription data acquisition request message is used to request data signed by the terminal and the network.
- the transceiver module 1401 is further configured to receive service information from an access and mobility management network element, and the processing module 1402 is further configured to obtain indication information according to the service requirement of the terminal not being met.
- the service information is used to indicate that the service requirement of the terminal is not met.
- the unmet service demand of the terminal includes: the bandwidth provided to the terminal cannot meet the bandwidth demand of the terminal's service, and/or the signal quality of the terminal cannot meet the signal quality demand of the terminal's service, or there may be any other possible situations, which are not limited to this.
- the processing module 1402 is also used to obtain indication information according to preset conditions, wherein the preset conditions include at least one of the following: the terminal is currently in a time period where multiple connections need to be established, or the terminal is located in an area where the terminal needs to establish multiple connections.
- the processing module 1402 is further configured to obtain the location of the terminal from an access and mobility management network element through a subscription service.
- the transceiver module 1401 is further configured to receive a subscription data management acquisition request message from an access and mobility management network element, wherein the subscription data management acquisition request message includes request information.
- the transceiver module 1401 is also used for the data management network element to receive a context registration request message from the session management network element during the session establishment process of the terminal, wherein the context registration request message includes slice information and/or data network name.
- the transceiver module 1401 may include a sending module (not shown in FIG. 14 ) and a receiving module (not shown in FIG. 14 ).
- the sending module is used to implement the sending function of the communication device 1400
- the receiving module is used to implement the receiving function of the communication device 1400 .
- the communication device 1400 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG. 14 ), which stores a program or instruction.
- a storage module not shown in FIG. 14
- the processing module 1402 executes the program or instruction
- the communication device 1400 may perform the functions in the method shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 8 above.
- the communication device 1400 can be a network device, or a chip (system) or other parts or components that can be set in the network device, or a device that includes a network device, which is not limited in this application.
- the technical effects of the communication device 1400 can refer to the technical effects of the above-mentioned communication method, which will not be repeated here.
- the communication device 1400 may be applied to the application function network element in the above communication method to implement the functions of the application function network element, as follows.
- the transceiver module 1401 is used to receive a request message, and the processing module 1402 is used to control the transceiver module 1401 to send a response message according to the request message.
- the request message is used to request the application function network element to provide a network that can be used to establish multiple connections. Multiple connections refer to establishing multiple third generation partnership project 3GPP access type connections at the same time. The 3GPP access type connections belong to the same or different networks.
- the response message includes a network list, and the multiple networks indicated by the network list are networks that can be used to establish multiple connections.
- the application function network element may specifically be a roaming handover application function SOR-AF network element, or any other possible type of AF network element, and there is no limitation on this.
- the transceiver module 1401 is also used to receive slice information and/or data network name corresponding to the terminal session, and the processing module 1402 is also used to determine the network list based on multiple networks that support slice information and/or data network names.
- the multiple networks indicated by the network list do not include a network currently accessed by the terminal.
- the network list further indicates the types of wireless access technologies subscribed by the terminal supported by the multiple networks.
- the transceiver module 1401 may include a sending module (not shown in FIG. 14 ) and a receiving module (not shown in FIG. 14 ).
- the sending module is used to implement the sending function of the communication device 1400
- the receiving module is used to implement the receiving function of the communication device 1400 .
- the communication device 1400 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG. 14 ), which stores a program or instruction.
- a storage module not shown in FIG. 14
- the processing module 1402 executes the program or instruction
- the communication device 1400 may perform the functions in the method shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 8 above.
- the transceiver module 1401 is used to receive the indication information, and the processing module 1402 is used to establish multiple connections according to the indication information.
- the indication information is used to indicate that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, and the multiple connections refer to establishing multiple third generation partnership project 3GPP access type connections at the same time, and the 3GPP access type connections belong to the same or different networks.
- the technical effects of the communication device 1400 can refer to the technical effects of the above-mentioned communication method, which will not be repeated here.
- the terminal has established a 3GPP access type connection with the first network
- the processing module 1402 is used to select a second network from multiple networks indicated by the network list, and control the transceiver module 1401 to establish a 3GPP access type connection with the second network.
- the network list is indicated by policy information, and the multiple networks indicated by the network list are networks that can be used to establish multiple connections.
- transceiver module 1401 is further configured to receive policy information from a network.
- the transceiver module 1401 may include a sending module (not shown in FIG. 14 ) and a receiving module (not shown in FIG. 14 ).
- the sending module is used to implement the sending function of the communication device 1400
- the receiving module is used to implement the receiving function of the communication device 1400 .
- the communication device 1400 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG. 14 ), which stores a program or instruction.
- a storage module not shown in FIG. 14
- the processing module 1402 executes the program or instruction
- the communication device 1400 may perform the functions in the method shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 8 above.
- the communication device 1400 can be a terminal, or a chip (system) or other parts or components that can be set in the terminal, or a device including a terminal, which is not limited in this application.
- the technical effects of the communication device 1400 can refer to the technical effects of the above-mentioned communication method, which will not be repeated here.
- the communication device 1400 may be applied to the policy control network element in the above communication method to implement the functions of the policy control network element, as follows.
- the processing module 1402 is used to obtain new policy information of the terminal when the policy information of the terminal needs to be updated, and the transceiver module 1401 is used to send new policy information to the terminal.
- the policy information is used to indicate that multiple connections need to be established. Multiple connections refer to establishing multiple third generation partnership project 3GPP access type connections at the same time. The 3GPP access type connections belong to the same or different networks. That is, by updating the policy information, the terminal can have the ability to establish multiple connections.
- the communication device 1400 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG. 14 ), which stores a program or instruction.
- a storage module not shown in FIG. 14
- the processing module 1402 executes the program or instruction
- the communication device 1400 may perform the functions in the method shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 8 above.
- the communication device 1400 can be a network device, or a chip (system) or other parts or components that can be set in the network device, or a device that includes a network device, which is not limited in this application.
- the technical effects of the communication device 1400 can refer to the technical effects of the above-mentioned communication method, which will not be repeated here.
- FIG15 is a second schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication device may be a terminal, or a chip (system) or other component or assembly that may be provided in a terminal.
- a communication device 1500 may include a processor 1501.
- the communication device 1500 may further include a memory 1502 and/or a transceiver 1503.
- the processor 1501 is coupled to the memory 1502 and the transceiver 1503, such as by a communication bus.
- the processor 1501 is the control center of the communication device 1500, which can be a processor or a general term for multiple processing elements.
- the processor 1501 is one or more central processing units (CPUs), or an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the embodiments of the present application, such as one or more microprocessors (digital signal processors, DSPs), or one or more field programmable gate arrays (field programmable gate arrays, FPGAs).
- CPUs central processing units
- ASIC application specific integrated circuit
- integrated circuits configured to implement the embodiments of the present application, such as one or more microprocessors (digital signal processors, DSPs), or one or more field programmable gate arrays (field programmable gate arrays, FPGAs).
- the processor 1501 can execute various functions of the communication device 1500 by running or executing a software program stored in the memory 1502 and calling data stored in the memory 1502, such as executing the communication method shown in Figures 8 to 13 above.
- the processor 1501 may include one or more CPUs, such as CPU0 and CPU1 shown in FIG. 15 .
- the memory 1502 may be a read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, a random access memory (RAM) or other types of dynamic storage devices that can store information and instructions, or an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), a compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or other optical disc storage, optical disc storage (including compressed optical disc, laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc, Blu-ray disc, etc.), a magnetic disk storage medium or other magnetic storage device, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store the desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited thereto.
- the memory 1502 may be integrated with the processor 1501, or may exist independently and be coupled to the processor 1501 through an interface circuit (not shown in FIG. 15 ) of the communication device 1500, which is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
- the transceiver 1503 is used for communication with other communication devices. For example, if the communication device 1500 is a terminal, the transceiver 1503 can be used to communicate with a network device, or with another terminal device. For another example, if the communication device 1500 is a network device, the transceiver 1503 can be used to communicate with a terminal, or with another network device.
- the structure of the communication device 1500 shown in FIG. 15 does not constitute a limitation on the communication device, and an actual communication device may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or a combination of certain components, or a different arrangement of components.
- the technical effects of the communication device 1500 can refer to the technical effects of the method described in the above method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
- processors in the embodiments of the present application may be a central processing unit (CPU), and the processor may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSP), application-specific integrated circuits (ASIC), field programmable gate arrays (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
- DSP digital signal processor
- ASIC application-specific integrated circuits
- FPGA field programmable gate arrays
- a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor, etc.
- the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memories.
- the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), or a flash memory.
- the volatile memory may be a random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
- RAM random access memory
- SRAM static RAM
- DRAM dynamic random access memory
- SDRAM synchronous DRAM
- DDR SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
- ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
- SLDRAM synchronous link DRAM
- DR RAM direct rambus RAM
- the above embodiments can be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware (such as circuits), firmware or any other combination.
- the above embodiments can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
- the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions or computer programs. When the computer instructions or computer programs are loaded or executed on a computer, the process or function described in the embodiment of the present application is generated in whole or in part.
- the computer can be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
- the computer instructions can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本申请要求于2024年01月05日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202410026771.1、申请名称为“通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office on January 5, 2024, with application number 202410026771.1 and application name “Communication Method and Device”, all contents of which are incorporated by reference in this application.
本申请涉及通信领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及装置。The present application relates to the field of communications, and in particular to a communication method and device.
在目前第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)定义的用户设备(uesr equipment,UE)的网络选择流程中,当UE选择好一个网络并成功注册之后,UE处于在网状态,若UE触发重选网,则UE会选择一个新的网络替换当前网络,这种方式可能无法满足UE在未来更多更灵活的通信需求。In the network selection process of user equipment (UE) defined by the current 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP), after the UE selects a network and successfully registers, the UE is in the network state. If the UE triggers network reselection, the UE will select a new network to replace the current network. This method may not meet the UE's more flexible communication needs in the future.
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法及装置,以实现终端能够同时与多个网络分别建立3GPP接入类型的连接,从而满足终端的更多更灵活的通信需求。The embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and apparatus to enable a terminal to simultaneously establish 3GPP access type connections with multiple networks, thereby meeting more flexible communication needs of the terminal.
为达到上述目的,本申请采用如下技术方案:In order to achieve the above objectives, this application adopts the following technical solutions:
第一方面,提供一种通信方法,应用于数据管理网元,包括:在终端未建立多连接的情况下,数据管理网元获取指示信息,并向终端发送指示信息。其中,指示信息用于指示终端需要建立多连接,多连接是指同时建立多个第三代合作伙伴计划3GPP接入类型的连接,3GPP接入类型的连接属于相同或不同的网络。In a first aspect, a communication method is provided, which is applied to a data management network element, including: when a terminal does not establish multiple connections, the data management network element obtains indication information and sends the indication information to the terminal. The indication information is used to indicate that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, and the multiple connections refer to establishing multiple third generation partnership project 3GPP access type connections at the same time, and the 3GPP access type connections belong to the same or different networks.
基于第一方面的方法可知,由于网络侧,即数据管理网元可以将多连接的指示信息,使得终端可以根据指示信息,触发同时建立多个3GPP接入类型的连接,也即,同时接入并注册到多个网络,以满足终端的更多更灵活的通信需求。Based on the method of the first aspect, it can be known that since the network side, that is, the data management network element, can provide the indication information of multiple connections, the terminal can trigger the establishment of multiple 3GPP access type connections at the same time according to the indication information, that is, simultaneously access and register to multiple networks to meet the terminal's more flexible communication needs.
可以理解,终端在未建立多连接的情况下触发建立多连接为一种示例,不作为限定,终端建立多连接可以不考虑当前是否已建立多连接,比如,终端在已建立多连接的情况下仍可以继续建立多连接,如已建立的多连接是2个3GPP接入类型的连接,终端可以继续建立多连接,如增加到3个3GPP接入类型的连接。或者,终端在已建立多连接的情况下,根据本发明的方案触发UE更改连接的网络。It can be understood that the triggering of establishing multiple connections by the terminal when multiple connections have not been established is an example and is not intended to be limiting. The terminal may establish multiple connections regardless of whether multiple connections have been established currently. For example, the terminal may continue to establish multiple connections when multiple connections have been established. For example, if the established multiple connections are two 3GPP access type connections, the terminal may continue to establish multiple connections, such as increasing the number to three 3GPP access type connections. Alternatively, when multiple connections have been established, the terminal triggers the UE to change the connected network according to the solution of the present invention.
一种可能的设计方案中,指示信息包括网络列表,网络列表指示的多个网络为能用于建立多连接的网络。也就是说,网络侧能够通过网络列表,将能用于建立多连接的网络指示给终端,以确保终端选择接入的网络是能够支持建立多连接的网络,避免因终端选择的网络不支持多连接而导致冗余。当然,如果终端本地预配置有网络列表,那么网络侧也无需向终端下发网络列表,以降低通信开销。In one possible design, the indication information includes a network list, and the multiple networks indicated by the network list are networks that can be used to establish multiple connections. That is, the network side can indicate the networks that can be used to establish multiple connections to the terminal through the network list to ensure that the network selected by the terminal to access is a network that can support the establishment of multiple connections, avoiding redundancy caused by the network selected by the terminal not supporting multiple connections. Of course, if the terminal is pre-configured with a network list locally, the network side does not need to send the network list to the terminal to reduce communication overhead.
可选地,第一方面所述的方法还可以包括:数据管理网元从应用功能获取指示信息。Optionally, the method described in the first aspect may further include: the data management network element obtains indication information from the application function.
可选地,在数据管理网元从应用功能获取指示信息之前,第一方面所述的方法还可以包括:数据管理网元向应用功能网元发送终端的会话对应的切片信息和/或数据网络名称;网络列表指示的多个网络为支持切片信息和/或数据网络名称的网络,以确保与终端建立多连接的网络都是能够满足终端的业务需求的网络。Optionally, before the data management network element obtains indication information from the application function, the method described in the first aspect may also include: the data management network element sends slice information and/or data network name corresponding to the session of the terminal to the application function network element; the multiple networks indicated in the network list are networks that support slice information and/or data network names, so as to ensure that the networks establishing multiple connections with the terminal are all networks that can meet the business needs of the terminal.
可选地,网络列表指示的多个网络中不包含终端当前接入的网络,以避免终端继续选择接入终端当前已接入的网络而导致多连接建立失败。Optionally, the multiple networks indicated by the network list do not include the network currently accessed by the terminal, so as to avoid the terminal continuing to select the network currently accessed by the terminal, resulting in failure of establishing multiple connections.
一种可能的设计方案中,网络列表还指示多个网络支持终端签约的无线接入技术类型,这些无线接入技术类型可以不同,如PLMN#2支持终端签约的无线接入技术类型为TN,PLMN#3支持终端签约的无线接入技术类型为TN和NTN,PLMN#4支持终端签约的无线接入技术类型为NTN,又如PLMN#2支持终端签约的无线接入技术类型为5G,PLMN#3支持终端签约的无线接入技术类型为5G和6G,PLMN#4支持终端签约的无线接入技术类型为6G等,避免因无线接入技术类型不支持而导致多连接建立失败。In a possible design scheme, the network list also indicates the types of wireless access technologies supported by the terminals for contracting in multiple networks. These wireless access technology types may be different. For example, the wireless access technology type supported by PLMN#2 is TN, the wireless access technology type supported by PLMN#3 is TN and NTN, and the wireless access technology type supported by PLMN#4 is NTN. For another example, the wireless access technology type supported by PLMN#2 is 5G, the wireless access technology type supported by PLMN#3 is 5G and 6G, and the wireless access technology type supported by PLMN#4 is 6G, etc., to avoid failure in establishing multiple connections due to unsupported wireless access technology types.
一种可能的设计方案中,数据管理网元获取指示信息,包括:数据管理网元接收终端的能力信息,并根据终端的能力信息,获取指示信息。其中,终端的能力信息用于指示终端支持多连接,以避免因终端不支持多连接而指示终端建立多连接,导致通信资源浪费。In a possible design, the data management network element obtains the indication information, including: the data management network element receives the capability information of the terminal, and obtains the indication information according to the capability information of the terminal. The capability information of the terminal is used to indicate that the terminal supports multiple connections, so as to avoid instructing the terminal to establish multiple connections because the terminal does not support multiple connections, resulting in a waste of communication resources.
可选地,数据管理网元接收终端的能力信息,包括:在终端注册的过程中,数据管理网元接收来自接入和移动性管理网元的上下文注册请求消息,其中,上下文注册请求消息包括终端的能力信息,也即,复用已有的注册流程实现对终端的多连接能力的感知,或者,也可以通过新定义的流程实现,与现有的流程解耦,信元传递可以更灵活。Optionally, the data management network element receives the capability information of the terminal, including: during the terminal registration process, the data management network element receives a context registration request message from the access and mobility management network element, wherein the context registration request message includes the capability information of the terminal, that is, reusing the existing registration process to realize the perception of the multi-connection capability of the terminal, or, it can also be realized through a newly defined process, which is decoupled from the existing process, and the cell transmission can be more flexible.
一种可能的设计方案中,数据管理网元获取指示信息,包括:数据管理网元获取终端请求的切片信息,并根据网络切片是多连接的业务对应的切片,获取指示信息。其中,终端请求的切片信息用于指示终端请求的网络切片,也即,终端请求的网络切片需要网络提供多连接,从能够保障终端的服务需求。In a possible design scheme, the data management network element obtains the indication information, including: the data management network element obtains the slice information requested by the terminal, and obtains the indication information according to the network slice being the slice corresponding to the multi-connection service. The slice information requested by the terminal is used to indicate the network slice requested by the terminal, that is, the network slice requested by the terminal requires the network to provide multiple connections, so as to ensure the service requirements of the terminal.
可选地,数据管理网元获取终端请求的切片信息,包括:在终端注册的过程中,数据管理网元接收来自接入和移动性管理网元的上下文注册请求消息。其中,上下文注册请求消息包括终端请求的切片信息,也即,复用已有的注册流程实现对终端的多连接需求的感知,或者,也可以通过新定义的流程实现,与现有的流程解耦,信元传递可以更灵活。Optionally, the data management network element obtains the slice information requested by the terminal, including: during the terminal registration process, the data management network element receives a context registration request message from the access and mobility management network element. The context registration request message includes the slice information requested by the terminal, that is, the existing registration process is reused to realize the perception of the multi-connection requirements of the terminal, or it can also be realized through a newly defined process, which is decoupled from the existing process, and the information element transmission can be more flexible.
一种可能的设计方案中,数据管理网元获取指示信息,包括:数据管理网元获取终端的签约数据,并根据终端的签约数据,获取指示信息。其中,终端的签约数据指示终端支持多连接,也即,表示终端是签约了多连接的用户,避免因向未签约的用户发送多连接的相关信息而导致通信冗余。In a possible design, the data management network element obtains the indication information, including: the data management network element obtains the contract data of the terminal, and obtains the indication information according to the contract data of the terminal. The contract data of the terminal indicates that the terminal supports multiple connections, that is, it indicates that the terminal is a user who has signed a contract for multiple connections, avoiding communication redundancy caused by sending relevant information of multiple connections to unsigned users.
可选地,数据管理网元获取终端的签约数据,包括:在终端注册的过程中,数据管理网元接收来自接入和移动性管理网元的签约数据获取请求消息,并根据签约数据获取请求消息,获取终端的签约数据。其中,签约数据获取请求消息用于请求终端与网络签约的数据;也即,复用已有的注册流程实现对终端的签约数据的感知,或者,也可以通过新定义的流程实现,与现有的流程解耦,信元传递可以更灵活。Optionally, the data management network element obtains the contract data of the terminal, including: during the terminal registration process, the data management network element receives a contract data acquisition request message from the access and mobility management network element, and obtains the contract data of the terminal according to the contract data acquisition request message. The contract data acquisition request message is used to request the data of the contract between the terminal and the network; that is, the existing registration process is reused to realize the perception of the contract data of the terminal, or it can also be realized through a newly defined process, which is decoupled from the existing process, and the information element transmission can be more flexible.
一种可能的设计方案中,数据管理网元获取指示信息,包括:数据管理网元接收来自接入和移动性管理网元的业务信息,并根据终端的业务需求未被满足,获取指示信息。其中,业务信息用于指示终端的业务需求未被满足,此时,需要网络触发建立多连接来提供额外的网络资源,以满足终端的业务需求。In a possible design, the data management network element obtains the indication information, including: the data management network element receives service information from the access and mobility management network element, and obtains the indication information according to the service demand of the terminal not being met. The service information is used to indicate that the service demand of the terminal is not met, and at this time, the network needs to trigger the establishment of multiple connections to provide additional network resources to meet the service demand of the terminal.
可选地,终端的业务需求未被满足包括:为终端提供的带宽无法满足终端的业务对带宽的需求,和/或,终端的信号质量无法满足终端的业务对信号质量的需求,或者还可以有其他任何可能的情况,对此不做限定。Optionally, the unmet service demand of the terminal includes: the bandwidth provided to the terminal cannot meet the bandwidth demand of the terminal's service, and/or the signal quality of the terminal cannot meet the signal quality demand of the terminal's service, or there may be any other possible situations, which are not limited to this.
一种可能的设计方案中,数据管理网元获取指示信息,包括:数据管理网元可以根据预设条件,获取指示信息,其中,预设条件包括如下至少一项:当前在终端需要建立多连接的时间段内、或终端的位置位于终端需要建立多连接的区域内,也即,数据管理网元可以根据当前的时间和终端当前的位置,自行决定触发建立多连接,避免因与其他的网元交互所带来额外的通信开销。In one possible design scheme, the data management network element obtains indication information, including: the data management network element can obtain indication information according to preset conditions, wherein the preset conditions include at least one of the following: the terminal is currently within the time period where multiple connections need to be established, or the terminal is located in the area where the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, that is, the data management network element can decide on its own to trigger the establishment of multiple connections based on the current time and the current location of the terminal, thereby avoiding additional communication overhead caused by interaction with other network elements.
可选地,第一方面所述的方法还可以包括:数据管理网元可以通过订阅服务从接入和移动性管理网元获取终端的位置,或者,也可以通过其他方式获取终端的位置,如接入网设备通过接入和移动性管理网元上报给数据管理网元,具体可以根据实际需求选择,对此不做具体限制。Optionally, the method described in the first aspect may also include: the data management network element may obtain the location of the terminal from the access and mobility management network element through a subscription service, or may obtain the location of the terminal through other means, such as the access network device reporting to the data management network element through the access and mobility management network element. The specific selection can be based on actual needs and there is no specific restriction on this.
一种可能的设计方案中,数据管理网元获取指示信息,包括:数据管理网元接收来自终端的请求信息,并根据请求信息,获取指示信息。其中,请求信息用于指示终端请求建立多连接,也即,多连接的建立可以由终端自行决定触发,使得终端与网络侧在触发建立多连接过程中的交互更简单,通信开销可以更小。In a possible design scheme, the data management network element obtains the indication information, including: the data management network element receives request information from the terminal, and obtains the indication information according to the request information. The request information is used to indicate that the terminal requests to establish multiple connections, that is, the establishment of multiple connections can be triggered by the terminal itself, so that the interaction between the terminal and the network side in the process of triggering the establishment of multiple connections is simpler, and the communication overhead can be smaller.
可选地,数据管理网元接收来自终端的请求信息,包括:数据管理网元接收来自接入和移动性管理网元的签约数据管理获取请求消息,其中,签约数据管理获取请求消息包括请求信息,也即,通过复用已有信令实现,或者,也可以通过新定义的流程实现,与现有的流程解耦,信元传递可以更灵活。Optionally, the data management network element receives request information from the terminal, including: the data management network element receives a contract data management acquisition request message from the access and mobility management network element, wherein the contract data management acquisition request message includes request information, that is, it is implemented by reusing existing signaling, or it can also be implemented through a newly defined process, which is decoupled from the existing process, and the signal element transmission can be more flexible.
一种可能的设计方案中,数据管理网元获取指示信息,包括:数据管理网元获取终端的会话对应的切片信息和/或数据网络名称,并根据终端的业务是需要建立多连接的业务,获取指示信息。其中,切片信息和/或数据网络名称与终端的业务对应,也即,也可以实现按终端的业务需求建立多连接,以实现按需建立,避免冗余。In a possible design scheme, the data management network element obtains the indication information, including: the data management network element obtains the slice information and/or data network name corresponding to the session of the terminal, and obtains the indication information according to whether the service of the terminal needs to establish multiple connections. The slice information and/or data network name corresponds to the service of the terminal, that is, multiple connections can also be established according to the service requirements of the terminal to achieve on-demand establishment and avoid redundancy.
可选地,数据管理网元获取终端的会话对应的切片信息和/或数据网络名称,包括:在终端的会话建立过程中,数据管理网元接收来自会话管理网元的上下文注册请求消息,其中,上下文注册请求消息包括切片信息和/或数据网络名称,也即,通过复用会话建立流程中的已有信令实现,或者,也可以通过新定义的流程实现,与现有的流程解耦,信元传递可以更灵活。Optionally, the data management network element obtains the slice information and/or data network name corresponding to the session of the terminal, including: during the session establishment process of the terminal, the data management network element receives a context registration request message from the session management network element, wherein the context registration request message includes the slice information and/or the data network name, that is, it is implemented by reusing existing signaling in the session establishment process, or it can also be implemented through a newly defined process, which is decoupled from the existing process and the cell transmission can be more flexible.
或者,数据管理网元也可以确定当前网络无法满足终端的业务要求。例如,终端请求的切片当前网络智能提供部分、或终端请求的业务当前网络无法提供,举例:非公共网络(non-public network,NPN)无法提供网际互连协议(internet protocol,IP)多媒体业务(IP multi-media srvice,IMS)服务,在UE接入NPN的场景下可以额外选择一个PLMN获取IMS服务。这种情况下,数据管理网元触发建立多连接,用以满足终端的业务对网络要求。Alternatively, the data management network element may determine that the current network cannot meet the service requirements of the terminal. For example, the current network can only provide part of the slices requested by the terminal, or the service requested by the terminal cannot be provided by the current network. For example, the non-public network (NPN) cannot provide Internet protocol (IP) multimedia service (IMS) services. In the scenario where the UE accesses the NPN, an additional PLMN can be selected to obtain IMS services. In this case, the data management network element triggers the establishment of multiple connections to meet the network requirements of the terminal's services.
第二方面,提供一种通信方法,应用于应用功能网元,包括:应用功能网元接收请求消息,并根据请求消息,发送响应消息。其中,请求消息用于请求应用功能网元提供能用于建立多连接的网络,多连接是指同时建立多个第三代合作伙伴计划3GPP接入类型的连接,3GPP接入类型的连接属于相同或不同的网络;响应消息包括网络列表,网络列表指示的多个网络为能用于建立多连接的网络。In a second aspect, a communication method is provided, which is applied to an application function network element, including: the application function network element receives a request message, and sends a response message according to the request message. The request message is used to request the application function network element to provide a network that can be used to establish multiple connections, and multiple connections refer to establishing multiple third generation partnership project 3GPP access type connections at the same time, and the 3GPP access type connections belong to the same or different networks; the response message includes a network list, and the multiple networks indicated by the network list are networks that can be used to establish multiple connections.
可以理解,应用功能网元具体可以是漫游切换应用功能SOR-AF网元,或者其他任何可能类型的AF网元,对此不做限制。It can be understood that the application function network element may specifically be a roaming handover application function SOR-AF network element, or any other possible type of AF network element, and there is no limitation on this.
一种可能的设计方案中,第二方面所述的方法还可以包括:应用功能网元接收终端的会话对应的切片信息和/或数据网络名称,并根据支持切片信息和/或数据网络名称的多个网络,确定网络列表。In a possible design scheme, the method described in the second aspect may also include: the application function network element receives the slice information and/or data network name corresponding to the session of the terminal, and determines the network list based on multiple networks that support the slice information and/or data network name.
可选地,网络列表指示的多个网络中不包含终端当前接入的网络。Optionally, the multiple networks indicated by the network list do not include a network currently accessed by the terminal.
可选地,网络列表还指示多个网络支持终端签约的无线接入技术类型。Optionally, the network list further indicates the types of wireless access technologies subscribed by the terminal supported by the multiple networks.
可以理解,第二方面所述的方法的技术效果也可以参考上述第一方面所述的方法的相关介绍,不再赘述。It can be understood that the technical effects of the method described in the second aspect can also refer to the relevant introduction of the method described in the first aspect above, and will not be repeated here.
第三方面,提供一种通信方法,应用于接入和移动性管理网元,包括:接入和移动性管理网元向数据管理网元发送业务信息,接收数据管理网元根据业务信息的指示信息,并向终端发送指示信息。其中,业务信息指示终端的业务需求未被满足;指示信息用于指示终端需要建立多连接,多连接是指同时建立多个第三代合作伙伴计划3GPP接入类型的连接,3GPP接入类型的连接属于相同或不同的网络。In a third aspect, a communication method is provided, which is applied to an access and mobility management network element, including: the access and mobility management network element sends service information to a data management network element, receives indication information from the data management network element based on the service information, and sends indication information to a terminal. The service information indicates that the service demand of the terminal is not met; the indication information is used to indicate that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, and multiple connections refer to establishing multiple third generation partnership project 3GPP access type connections at the same time, and the 3GPP access type connections belong to the same or different networks.
一种可能的设计方案中,第三方面所述的方法还可以包括:接入和移动性管理网元接收来自接入网设备的N2消息,N2消息包括业务信息。接入和移动性管理网元根据业务信息,确定接入网设备无法满足终端对业务的需求。In a possible design, the method described in the third aspect may further include: the access and mobility management network element receives an N2 message from the access network device, the N2 message including service information. The access and mobility management network element determines, based on the service information, that the access network device cannot meet the service requirements of the terminal.
可选地,第三方面所述的方法还可以包括:接入和移动性管理网元根据终端位于低信号的区域,获取业务信息。其中,业务信息具体用于指示终端的信号质量无法满足终端的业务对信号质量的需求。Optionally, the method described in the third aspect may further include: the access and mobility management network element obtains service information according to the terminal being located in a low signal area, wherein the service information is specifically used to indicate that the signal quality of the terminal cannot meet the signal quality requirements of the terminal's service.
可以理解,第三方面所述的方法的技术效果也可以参考上述第一方面所述的方法的相关介绍,不再赘述。It can be understood that the technical effects of the method described in the third aspect can also refer to the relevant introduction of the method described in the first aspect above, and will not be repeated here.
第四方面,提供一种通信方法,该方法可以由终端执行,也可以由应用于终端的模块(例如处理器、芯片、或芯片系统等)执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分终端功能的逻辑节点、逻辑模块或软件实现。为方便表述,下文以该方法由终端执行为例进行介绍。该方法包括:接收指示信息,根据指示信息,建立多连接。其中,指示信息用于指示终端需要建立多连接,多连接是指同时建立多个第三代合作伙伴计划3GPP接入类型的连接,3GPP接入类型的连接属于相同或不同的网络。In a fourth aspect, a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a terminal, or by a module (such as a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) applied to the terminal, and can also be implemented by a logical node, a logical module or software that can implement all or part of the terminal functions. For the convenience of expression, the following is an introduction to the method being executed by a terminal as an example. The method includes: receiving indication information, and establishing multiple connections according to the indication information. Among them, the indication information is used to indicate that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, and multiple connections refer to establishing multiple third-generation partnership project 3GPP access type connections at the same time, and the 3GPP access type connections belong to the same or different networks.
一种可能的设计方案中,终端已与第一网络建立3GPP接入类型的连接,上述的根据指示信息,建立多连接,包括;根据指示信息,从网络列表指示的多个网络中选择第二网络,并与第二网络建立3GPP接入类型的连接。网络列表指示的多个网络为能用于建立多连接的网络。In one possible design, the terminal has established a 3GPP access type connection with the first network, and the establishing multiple connections according to the indication information includes: selecting a second network from multiple networks indicated by a network list according to the indication information, and establishing a 3GPP access type connection with the second network. The multiple networks indicated by the network list are networks that can be used to establish multiple connections.
可选地,网络列表指示的多个网络中不包含第一网络。Optionally, the multiple networks indicated by the network list do not include the first network.
可选地,网络列表还指示多个网络支持终端签约的无线接入技术类型。Optionally, the network list further indicates the types of wireless access technologies subscribed by the terminal supported by the multiple networks.
可选地,指示信息还用于指示网络列表。Optionally, the indication information is also used to indicate a network list.
一种可能的设计方案中,第四方面所述的方法还可以包括:发送终端的能力信息,其中,终端的能力信息用于指示终端支持多连接。In a possible design scheme, the method described in the fourth aspect may also include: sending capability information of the terminal, wherein the capability information of the terminal is used to indicate that the terminal supports multiple connections.
一种可能的设计方案中,第四方面所述的方法还可以包括:发送终端的会话对应的切片信息和/或数据网络名称。其中,切片信息和/或数据网络名称与终端的业务对应,且终端的业务是需要建立多连接的业务。In a possible design scheme, the method described in the fourth aspect may also include: sending slice information and/or data network name corresponding to the session of the terminal. Wherein the slice information and/or data network name corresponds to the service of the terminal, and the service of the terminal is a service that requires establishing multiple connections.
一种可能的设计方案中,第四方面所述的方法还可以包括:在终端需要建立多连接的情况下,发送请求信息,其中,请求信息用于指示终端请求建立多连接。In a possible design scheme, the method described in the fourth aspect may also include: sending request information when the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, wherein the request information is used to indicate that the terminal requests to establish multiple connections.
一种可能的设计方案中,第四方面所述的方法还可以包括:响应于用户开启多连接的操作,确定终端需要建立多连接,也即,实现根据用户的需求按需建立多连接,以保障用户的使用体验;或者;在终端的业务需要被执行情况下,获取与终端的业务匹配的策略信息;在策略信息指示需要建立多连接的情况下,确定终端需要建立多连接,使得多连接能够与业务的需求匹配,以保障用户的使用体验。In a possible design scheme, the method described in the fourth aspect may also include: in response to the user's operation of turning on multiple connections, determining that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, that is, establishing multiple connections on demand according to user needs to ensure the user's usage experience; or; when the terminal's business needs to be executed, obtaining policy information that matches the terminal's business; when the policy information indicates that multiple connections need to be established, determining that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections so that the multiple connections can match the business needs to ensure the user's usage experience.
其中,策略信息可以是URSP规则,本申请实施例是以URSP规则为例进行介绍,但不仅限于URSP规则,任何与URSP规则类似,或者说能够实现路由功能的策略和/或规则都可以用以实现本申请中的方案。Among them, the policy information can be a URSP rule. The embodiment of the present application is introduced by taking the URSP rule as an example, but is not limited to the URSP rule. Any policy and/or rule similar to the URSP rule or capable of implementing the routing function can be used to implement the solution in the present application.
可以理解,第四方面所述的方法的技术效果也可以参考上述第一方面所述的方法的相关介绍,不再赘述。It can be understood that the technical effects of the method described in the fourth aspect can also refer to the relevant introduction of the method described in the first aspect above, and will not be repeated here.
第五方面,提供一种通信方法,该方法可以由终端执行,也可以由应用于终端的模块(例如处理器、芯片、或芯片系统等)执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分终端功能的逻辑节点、逻辑模块或软件实现。为方便表述,下文以该方法由终端执行为例进行介绍。该方法包括:在终端的业务需要被执行情况下,获取与终端的业务匹配的策略信息;若策略信息指示需要建立多连接,则建立多连接,其中,多连接是指同时建立多个第三代合作伙伴计划3GPP接入类型的连接,3GPP接入类型的连接属于相同或不同的网络。In a fifth aspect, a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a terminal, or by a module (such as a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) applied to the terminal, or by a logical node, a logical module, or software that can implement all or part of the terminal functions. For the convenience of expression, the following is an introduction to the method being executed by a terminal as an example. The method includes: when the terminal's service needs to be executed, obtaining policy information that matches the terminal's service; if the policy information indicates that multiple connections need to be established, establishing multiple connections, wherein multiple connections refer to establishing multiple third-generation partnership project 3GPP access type connections at the same time, and the 3GPP access type connections belong to the same or different networks.
基于第五方面所述的方法可知,终端可以通过策略信息匹配,在业务匹配到需要建立多连接的策略信息时,触发与网络侧建立多连接,以保障多连接能够满足业务的需求,保障用户的使用体验。Based on the method described in the fifth aspect, it can be known that the terminal can match the policy information and trigger the establishment of multiple connections with the network side when the service matches the policy information that requires the establishment of multiple connections, so as to ensure that the multiple connections can meet the business needs and ensure the user experience.
一种可能的设计方案中,终端已与第一网络建立3GPP接入类型的连接,建立多连接,包括;从网络列表指示的多个网络中选择第二网络,并与第二网络建立3GPP接入类型的连接。其中,网络列表由策略信息指示,网络列表指示的多个网络为能用于建立多连接的网络。In one possible design, the terminal has established a 3GPP access type connection with a first network, and establishing multiple connections includes: selecting a second network from multiple networks indicated by a network list, and establishing a 3GPP access type connection with the second network. The network list is indicated by policy information, and the multiple networks indicated by the network list are networks that can be used to establish multiple connections.
一种可能的设计方案中,第五方面所述的方法还可以包括:终端从网络接收策略信息。In a possible design scheme, the method described in the fifth aspect may also include: the terminal receives policy information from the network.
其中,策略信息可以是URSP规则当然,本申请实施例是以URSP规则为例进行介绍,但不仅限于URSP规则,任何与URSP规则类似,或者说能够实现路由功能的策略和/或规则都可以用以实现本申请中的方案。Among them, the policy information can be a URSP rule. Of course, the embodiment of the present application is introduced by taking the URSP rule as an example, but is not limited to the URSP rule. Any policy and/or rule similar to the URSP rule, or capable of realizing the routing function, can be used to implement the solution in the present application.
可以理解,第五方面所述的方法的技术效果也可以参考上述第一方面所述的方法的相关介绍,不再赘述。It can be understood that the technical effects of the method described in the fifth aspect can also refer to the relevant introduction of the method described in the first aspect above, and will not be repeated here.
第六方面,提供一种通信方法,应用于策略控制网元,包括:在终端的策略信息需要更新的情况下,策略控制网元获取终端的新的策略信息,并向终端发送新的策略信息。其中,新的策略信息用于指示需要建立多连接,多连接是指同时建立多个第三代合作伙伴计划3GPP接入类型的连接,3GPP接入类型的连接属于相同或不同的网络。In a sixth aspect, a communication method is provided, which is applied to a policy control network element, including: when the policy information of a terminal needs to be updated, the policy control network element obtains new policy information of the terminal and sends the new policy information to the terminal. The new policy information is used to indicate that multiple connections need to be established, and the multiple connections refer to establishing multiple third generation partnership project 3GPP access type connections at the same time, and the 3GPP access type connections belong to the same or different networks.
一种可能的设计方案中,新的策略信息还指示建立多连接所需的无线接入技术类型组合。In a possible design, the new policy information further indicates a combination of radio access technology types required to establish multiple connections.
其中,策略信息可以是URSP规则,本申请实施例是以URSP规则为例,但不仅限于URSP规则,任何与URSP规则类似,或者说能够实现路由功能的策略和/或规则都可以用以实现本申请中的方案。Among them, the policy information can be a URSP rule. The embodiment of the present application takes the URSP rule as an example, but is not limited to the URSP rule. Any policy and/or rule similar to the URSP rule, or capable of implementing a routing function, can be used to implement the solution in the present application.
可以理解,第六方面所述的方法的技术效果也可以参考上述第一方面所述的方法的相关介绍,不再赘述。It can be understood that the technical effects of the method described in the sixth aspect can also refer to the relevant introduction of the method described in the first aspect above, and will not be repeated here.
第七方面,提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括用于执行上述的第一方面至第六方面中任一方面所述的方法的模块。In a seventh aspect, a communication device is provided, comprising a module for executing the method described in any one of the first to sixth aspects.
在一种可能的设计方案中,第七方面所述的通信装置还可以包括收发器。该收发器可以为收发电路或接口电路。该收发器可以用于第七方面所述的通信装置与其他通信装置通信。In a possible design solution, the communication device described in the seventh aspect may further include a transceiver. The transceiver may be a transceiver circuit or an interface circuit. The transceiver may be used for the communication device described in the seventh aspect to communicate with other communication devices.
在一种可能的设计方案中,第七方面所述的通信装置还可以包括存储器。该存储器可以与处理器集成在一起,也可以分开设置。该存储器可以用于存储第一方面至第六方面中任一方面的方式所涉及的指令。In a possible design scheme, the communication device described in the seventh aspect may also include a memory. The memory may be integrated with the processor or may be separately provided. The memory may be used to store instructions involved in the manner of any one of the first to sixth aspects.
在本申请实施例中,第七方面所述的通信装置可以为网络设备,或者可设置于该网络设备中的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件,或者包含该网络设备的装置。In an embodiment of the present application, the communication device described in the seventh aspect may be a network device, or a chip (system) or other parts or components that may be arranged in the network device, or a device including the network device.
可以理解,第七方面所述的装置的技术效果也可以参考上述第一方面至第六方面中任一方面的方法的相关介绍,不再赘述。It can be understood that the technical effect of the device described in the seventh aspect can also refer to the relevant introduction of the method in any one of the first to sixth aspects above, and will not be repeated here.
第八方面,提供一种通信装置。该通信装置包括:处理器,该处理器与存储器耦合,该处理器用于执行存储器中存储的指令,以使得该通信装置执行第一方面至第六方面中任一方面所述的方法。In an eighth aspect, a communication device is provided, comprising: a processor, the processor being coupled to a memory, the processor being configured to execute instructions stored in the memory, so that the communication device executes the method described in any one of the first to sixth aspects.
在一种可能的设计方案中,第八方面所述的通信装置还可以包括收发器。该收发器可以为收发电路或接口电路。该收发器可以用于第八方面所述的通信装置与其他通信装置通信。In a possible design solution, the communication device described in the eighth aspect may further include a transceiver. The transceiver may be a transceiver circuit or an interface circuit. The transceiver may be used for the communication device described in the eighth aspect to communicate with other communication devices.
在本申请实施例中,第八方面所述的通信装置可以为第一方面至第六方面中任一方面所述的网络设备,或者可设置于该网络设备中的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件,或者包含该网络设备的装置。In an embodiment of the present application, the communication device described in the eighth aspect may be the network device described in any one of the first to sixth aspects, or a chip (system) or other parts or components that may be arranged in the network device, or a device including the network device.
此外,第八方面所述的通信装置的技术效果可以参考第一方面至第六方面中任一方面所述的方法的技术效果,此处不再赘述。In addition, the technical effects of the communication device described in the eighth aspect can refer to the technical effects of the methods described in any one of the first aspect to the sixth aspect, and will not be repeated here.
第九方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:处理器和存储器;该存储器用于存储指令,当该处理器执行该指令时,以使该通信装置执行如第一方面至第六方面中任一方面所述的方法。In a ninth aspect, a communication device is provided, comprising: a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions, the communication device executes the method described in any one of the first to sixth aspects.
在一种可能的设计方案中,第九方面所述的通信装置还可以包括收发器。该收发器可以为收发电路或接口电路。该收发器可以用于第六方面所述的通信装置与其他通信装置进行通信。In a possible design scheme, the communication device described in the ninth aspect may further include a transceiver. The transceiver may be a transceiver circuit or an interface circuit. The transceiver may be used for the communication device described in the sixth aspect to communicate with other communication devices.
在本申请实施例中,第九方面所述的通信装置可以为第一方面至第六方面中任一方面所述的网络设备,或者可设置于该网络设备中的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件,或者包含该网络设备的装置。In an embodiment of the present application, the communication device described in aspect 9 may be the network device described in any one of aspects 1 to 6, or a chip (system) or other parts or components that may be arranged in the network device, or a device including the network device.
此外,第九方面所述的通信装置的技术效果可以参考第一方面至第六方面中任一方面所述的方法的技术效果,此处不再赘述。In addition, the technical effects of the communication device described in the ninth aspect can refer to the technical effects of the methods described in any one of the first to sixth aspects, and will not be repeated here.
第十方面,提供一种芯片,该芯片包括:控制器和接口电路,其中,控制器用于通过接口电路与其他装置交互,以执行如第一方面至第六方面中任一方面所述的方法。In a tenth aspect, a chip is provided, comprising: a controller and an interface circuit, wherein the controller is used to interact with other devices through the interface circuit to execute the method described in any one of the first to sixth aspects.
第十一方面,提供一种通信系统。该通信系统包括用于执行第一方面所述的方法的数据管理网元与执行第四方面所述的方法的终端。或者,该通信系统包括用于执行第五方面所述的方法的终端与执行第六方面所述的方法的策略控制网元。In an eleventh aspect, a communication system is provided. The communication system includes a data management network element for executing the method described in the first aspect and a terminal for executing the method described in the fourth aspect. Alternatively, the communication system includes a terminal for executing the method described in the fifth aspect and a policy control network element for executing the method described in the sixth aspect.
第十二方面,提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质包括存储计算机程序或指令,当该计算机程序或指令被运行时,使得该第一方面至第六方面中任一方面所述的方法被执行。In a twelfth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, which includes a computer program or instruction stored therein, and when the computer program or instruction is executed, the method described in any one of the first to sixth aspects is executed.
第十三方面,提供一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令被运行时,使得如第一方面至第六方面中任一方面所述的方法被执行。In a thirteenth aspect, a computer program product is provided, comprising a computer program or instructions, which, when executed, enables the method described in any one of the first to sixth aspects to be executed.
图1为5GS的架构示意图;FIG1 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of 5GS;
图2为注册中的SOR流程的示意图;FIG2 is a schematic diagram of the SOR process in registration;
图3为注册后的SOR流程的示意图;FIG3 is a schematic diagram of the SOR process after registration;
图4为会话建立流程的示意图;FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a session establishment process;
图5为双连接的架构示意图;FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a dual connection architecture;
图6为网络选择的示意图;FIG6 is a schematic diagram of network selection;
图7为本申请实施例提供的通信系统的架构示意图;FIG7 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的流程示意图一;FIG8 is a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的流程示意图二;FIG9 is a second flow chart of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的流程示意图三;FIG10 is a third flow chart of the communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的流程示意图四;FIG11 is a fourth flow chart of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的流程示意图五;FIG12 is a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的流程示意图六;FIG13 is a sixth flow chart of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图14为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的结构示意图一;FIG14 is a first structural diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图15为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的结构示意图二。FIG. 15 is a second schematic diagram of the structure of the communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如无线网络(Wi-Fi)系统,车到任意物体(vehicle to everything,V2X)通信系统、设备间(device-to-device,D2D)通信系统、车联网通信系统、第四代(4th generation,4G)移动通信系统,如长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access,WiMAX)通信系统、第五代(5th generation,5G)移动通信系统,如新空口(new radio,NR)系统,以及未来的通信系统,如5.5G,第六代(6th generation,6G)移动通信系统等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as wireless network (Wi-Fi) systems, vehicle to everything (V2X) communication systems, device-to-device (D2D) communication systems, vehicle network communication systems, fourth-generation (4G) mobile communication systems, such as long-term evolution (LTE) systems, worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) communication systems, fifth-generation (5G) mobile communication systems, such as new radio (NR) systems, and future communication systems, such as 5.5G and sixth-generation (6G) mobile communication systems.
方便理解,下面先介绍本申请所涉及的技术术语。For ease of understanding, the technical terms involved in this application are first introduced below.
图1为5GS的架构示意图。如图1所示,5GS包括:接入网(access network,AN)和核心网(core network,CN),还可以包括:终端。Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of the 5GS architecture. As shown in Figure 1, 5GS includes: access network (AN) and core network (CN), and may also include: terminals.
上述终端可以为具有收发功能的终端,或为可设置于该终端的芯片或芯片系统。该终端也可以称为用户设备(uesr equipment,UE)、接入终端、用户单元(subscriber unit)、用户站、移动站(mobile station,MS)、移动台、远方站、远端终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。本申请的实施例中的终端可以是手机(mobile phone)、蜂窝电话(cellular phone)、智能电话(smart phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、无线数据卡、个人数字助理电脑(personal digital assistant,PDA)、无线调制解调器(modem)、手持设备(handset)、膝上型电脑(laptop computer)、机器类型通信(machine type communication,MTC)终端、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、车载终端、具有终端功能的路边单元(road side unit,RSU)等。本申请的终端还可以是作为一个或多个部件或者单元而内置于车辆的车载模块、车载模组、车载部件、车载芯片或者车载单元。The terminal may be a terminal with transceiver functions, or a chip or chip system that can be set in the terminal. The terminal may also be called user equipment (UE), access terminal, subscriber unit, user station, mobile station (MS), mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device. The terminal in the embodiments of the present application can be a mobile phone, a cellular phone, a smart phone, a tablet computer, a wireless data card, a personal digital assistant (PDA), a wireless modem, a handheld device (handset), a laptop computer, a machine type communication (MTC) terminal, a computer with wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (VR) terminal, an augmented reality (AR) terminal, a wireless terminal in industrial control, a wireless terminal in self driving, a wireless terminal in remote medical, a wireless terminal in smart grid, a wireless terminal in transportation safety, a wireless terminal in smart city, a wireless terminal in smart home, a vehicle-mounted terminal, a road side unit (RSU) with terminal function, etc. The terminal of the present application may also be a vehicle-mounted module, a vehicle-mounted module, a vehicle-mounted component, a vehicle-mounted chip or a vehicle-mounted unit built into the vehicle as one or more components or units.
上述AN用于实现接入有关的功能,可以为授权用户提供入网功能,并能够根据用户的级别,业务的需求等确定不同质量的传输链路以传输用户数据。AN在终端与CN之间转发控制信号和用户数据。AN可以包括:接入网设备,也可以称为无线接入网设备(radio access network,RAN)设备。The above AN is used to implement access-related functions, can provide network access functions for authorized users, and can determine transmission links of different qualities to transmit user data according to the user level, business requirements, etc. AN forwards control signals and user data between the terminal and CN. AN can include: access network equipment, also known as radio access network (RAN) equipment.
CN主要负责维护移动网络的签约数据,为终端提供会话管理、移动性管理、策略管理以及安全认证等功能。CN主要包括如下全部或部分功能:用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)、鉴权服务器功能(authentication server function,AUSF)、接入和移动性管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)、会话管理功能(session management function,SMF)、网络切片选择功能(network slice selection function,NSSF)、网络开放功能(network exposure function,NEF)、网络存储功能(network repository function,NRF)、策略控制功能(policy control function,PCF)、统一数据管理(unified data management,UDM)、统一数据存储(unified data repository,UDR)、以及应用功能(application function,AF)。CN is mainly responsible for maintaining the subscription data of the mobile network and providing functions such as session management, mobility management, policy management and security authentication for terminals. CN mainly includes all or part of the following functions: user plane function (UPF), authentication server function (AUSF), access and mobility management function (AMF), session management function (SMF), network slice selection function (NSSF), network exposure function (NEF), network repository function (NRF), policy control function (PCF), unified data management (UDM), unified data repository (UDR), and application function (AF).
如图1所示,UE通过RAN设备接入5G网络,UE通过N1接口(简称N1)与AMF通信;RAN通过N2接口(简称N2)与AMF通信;RAN通过N3接口简称N3与UPF通信;SMF通过N4接口(简称N4)与UPF通信,UPF通过N6接口(简称N6)接入数据网络(data network,DN)。此外,图1所示的AUSF、AMF、SMF、NSSF、NEF、NRF、PCF、UDM、UDR或者AF等控制面功能采用服务化接口进行交互。比如,AUSF对外提供的服务化接口为Nausf;AMF对外提供的服务化接口为Namf;SMF对外提供的服务化接口为Nsmf;NSSF对外提供的服务化接口为Nnssf;NEF对外提供的服务化接口为Nnef;NRF对外提供的服务化接口为Nnrf;PCF对外提供的服务化接口为Npcf;UDM对外提供的服务化接口为Nudm;UDR对外提供的服务化接口为Nudr;AF对外提供的服务化接口为Naf。As shown in Figure 1, UE accesses the 5G network through RAN equipment, and UE communicates with AMF through N1 interface (referred to as N1); RAN communicates with AMF through N2 interface (referred to as N2); RAN communicates with UPF through N3 interface (referred to as N3); SMF communicates with UPF through N4 interface (referred to as N4), and UPF accesses the data network (DN) through N6 interface (referred to as N6). In addition, the control plane functions such as AUSF, AMF, SMF, NSSF, NEF, NRF, PCF, UDM, UDR or AF shown in Figure 1 interact using service-oriented interfaces. For example, the service-oriented interface provided by AUSF to the outside is Nausf; the service-oriented interface provided by AMF to the outside is Namf; the service-oriented interface provided by SMF to the outside is Nsmf; the service-oriented interface provided by NSSF to the outside is Nnssf; the service-oriented interface provided by NEF to the outside is Nnef; the service-oriented interface provided by NRF to the outside is Nnrf; the service-oriented interface provided by PCF to the outside is Npcf; the service-oriented interface provided by UDM to the outside is Nudm; the service-oriented interface provided by UDR to the outside is Nudr; and the service-oriented interface provided by AF to the outside is Naf.
RAN设备可以是为终端提供接入的设备。例如,RAN设备可以包括:下一代移动通信系统,例如6G的接入网设备,例如6G基站,或者在下一代移动通信系统中,该网络设备也可以有其他命名方式,其均涵盖在本申请实施例的保护范围以内,本申请对此不做任何限定。或者,RAN设备也可以包括5G,如新空口(new radio,NR)系统中的gNB,或,5G中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板,或者,还可以为构成gNB、传输点(transmission and reception point,TRP或者transmission point,TP)或传输测量功能(transmission measurement function,TMF)的网络节点,如基带单元(building base band unit,BBU),或,集中单元(centralized unit,CU)或分布单元(distributed unit,DU)、具有基站功能的RSU,或者有线接入网关,或者5G的核心网。或者,RAN设备还可以包括无线保真(wireless fidelity,WiFi)系统中的接入点(access point,AP),无线中继节点、无线回传节点、各种形式的宏基站、微基站(也称为小站)、中继站、接入点、可穿戴设备、车载设备等等。RAN equipment can be equipment that provides access to terminals. For example, RAN equipment can include: access network equipment of a next-generation mobile communication system, such as 6G, such as a 6G base station, or in a next-generation mobile communication system, the network equipment can also have other naming methods, which are all covered within the scope of protection of the embodiments of the present application, and the present application does not make any restrictions on this. Alternatively, the RAN equipment can also include 5G, such as a gNB in a new radio (NR) system, or one or a group of antenna panels (including multiple antenna panels) of a base station in 5G, or a network node constituting a gNB, a transmission point (transmission and reception point, TRP or transmission point, TP) or a transmission measurement function (transmission measurement function, TMF), such as a baseband unit (building base band unit, BBU), or a centralized unit (centralized unit, CU) or a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU), an RSU with base station function, or a wired access gateway, or a 5G core network. Alternatively, RAN equipment may also include access points (APs) in wireless fidelity (WiFi) systems, wireless relay nodes, wireless backhaul nodes, various forms of macro base stations, micro base stations (also called small stations), relay stations, access points, wearable devices, vehicle-mounted devices, and so on.
UPF主要负责用户数据处理(转发、接收、计费等)。例如,UPF可以接收来自数据网络(data network,DN)的用户数据,通过接入网设备向终端转发该用户数据。UPF也可以通过接入网设备接收来自终端的用户数据,并向DN转发该用户数据。DN指的是为用户提供数据传输服务的运营商网络。例如网际互连协议(internet protocol,IP)多媒体业务(IP multi-media srvice,IMS)、互联网(internet)等。DN可以为运营商外部网络,也可以为运营商控制的网络,用于向终端提供业务服务。在协议数据单元(protocol data unit,PDU)会话中,通过N6与DN直接相连的UPF,也称为协议数据单元会话锚点(protocol data unit Session Anchor,PSA)。UPF is mainly responsible for user data processing (forwarding, receiving, billing, etc.). For example, UPF can receive user data from the data network (DN) and forward the user data to the terminal through the access network equipment. UPF can also receive user data from the terminal through the access network equipment and forward the user data to the DN. DN refers to the operator network that provides data transmission services to users. For example, Internet protocol (IP) multimedia service (IMS), Internet, etc. DN can be an operator's external network or a network controlled by an operator, used to provide business services to terminals. In a protocol data unit (PDU) session, the UPF directly connected to the DN through N6 is also called a protocol data unit session anchor (PSA).
AUSF主要用于执行终端的安全认证。AUSF is mainly used to perform terminal security authentication.
AMF主要用于移动网络中的移动性管理。例如用户位置更新、用户注册网络、用户切换等。AMF is mainly used for mobility management in mobile networks, such as user location update, user network registration, user switching, etc.
SMF主要用于移动网络中的会话管理。例如会话建立、修改、释放。具体功能例如为用户分配互联网协议(internet protocol,IP)地址,选择提供数据包转发功能的UPF等。SMF is mainly used for session management in mobile networks, such as session establishment, modification, and release. Specific functions include allocating Internet Protocol (IP) addresses to users and selecting UPFs that provide data packet forwarding functions.
PCF主要支持提供统一的策略框架来控制网络行为,提供策略规则给控制层网络功能,同时负责获取与策略决策相关的用户签约信息。PCF可以向AMF、SMF提供策略,例如服务质量(quality of service,QoS)策略、切片选择策略等。PCF mainly supports providing a unified policy framework to control network behavior, provides policy rules to the control layer network functions, and is responsible for obtaining user subscription information related to policy decisions. PCF can provide policies to AMF and SMF, such as quality of service (QoS) policy, slice selection policy, etc.
NSSF主要用于为终端选择网络切片。NSSF is mainly used to select network slices for terminals.
NEF主要用于支持能力和事件的开放。NEF is mainly used to support the opening of capabilities and events.
UDM主要用于存储用户数据,例如签约数据、鉴权/授权数据等。UDM is mainly used to store user data, such as contract data, authentication/authorization data, etc.
UDR主要用于存储结构化数据,存储的内容包括签约数据和策略数据、对外暴露的结构化数据和应用相关的数据。UDR is mainly used to store structured data, including contract data and policy data, externally exposed structured data, and application-related data.
AF主要支持与CN交互来提供服务,例如影响数据路由决策、策略控制功能或者向网络侧提供第三方的一些服务。AF mainly supports interaction with CN to provide services, such as influencing data routing decisions, policy control functions, or providing some third-party services to the network side.
可以理解,本申请实施例提到的功能也可以表述功能网元或功能实体,例如UPF可以表述为UPF网元、AMF可以表述为AMF网元、SMF可以表述为SMF网元、PCF可以表述为PCF网元等等,以此类推,不做限定。It can be understood that the functions mentioned in the embodiments of the present application can also be expressed as functional network elements or functional entities. For example, UPF can be expressed as UPF network element, AMF can be expressed as AMF network element, SMF can be expressed as SMF network element, PCF can be expressed as PCF network element, and so on, without limitation.
2、UE路由选择策略(UEroute selection policy,URSP):2. UE route selection policy (URSP):
URSP规则是由PCF网元向UE下发的策略信息,每当出现一个新的应用需要建立会话获取服务时,UE会评估URSP规则并选择最合适的URSP规则来匹配该应用,用以UE在建立该应用的会话时,会按照选择的URSP规则的要求建立会话。URSP rules are policy information sent by the PCF network element to the UE. Whenever a new application needs to establish a session to obtain services, the UE will evaluate the URSP rules and select the most appropriate URSP rule to match the application. When the UE establishes a session for the application, it will establish the session according to the requirements of the selected URSP rule.
URSP规则中具体包含如下几项:The URSP rules specifically include the following:
1)业务量描述词(traffic descriptor):1) Traffic descriptor:
业务量描述词中包含了一些用于和应用匹配的参数,例如应用描述符(OS ID和APP ID)、IP描述符、域名描述符、数据网络名称(data network name,DNN)等信息,当UE需要发起一个新的业务时,UE需要根据业务的特征和业务量描述词进行匹配,并选择最匹配的URSP规则为UE服务。例如,当用户想要使用社交软件,并且URSP规则中存在APP ID为社交软件业务量描述词时,UE应该匹配这个URSP规则,并按照URSP规则的要求建立会话获取服务。The traffic descriptor contains some parameters for matching with applications, such as application descriptors (OS ID and APP ID), IP descriptors, domain name descriptors, data network name (DNN) and other information. When the UE needs to initiate a new service, the UE needs to match the traffic descriptor according to the characteristics of the service and select the best matching URSP rule to serve the UE. For example, when a user wants to use social software, and there is an APP ID in the URSP rule as a social software traffic descriptor, the UE should match this URSP rule and establish a session to obtain services according to the requirements of the URSP rule.
2)路由选择描述符(route selection descriptors,RSD):2) Route selection descriptors (RSD):
一个URSP规则中可以包含一个或多个路由选择描述符,不同路由选择描述符直接有不同的优先级,UE建立会话时需要按照路由选择描述符RSD的要求建立会话,具体细化来说,可以分为如下两个部分:A URSP rule can contain one or more routing descriptors. Different routing descriptors have different priorities. When a UE establishes a session, it needs to establish a session according to the requirements of the routing descriptor RSD. Specifically, it can be divided into the following two parts:
a)路由选择组件(route selection components):a) Route selection components:
路由选择组件包含会话和服务连续性模式(session and service continuity mode,SSC mode)、切片信息、DNN信息等,当UE建立会话时,UE需要根据路由选择组件的要求建立对应的会话,可选地,路由选择组件可以包含接入类型偏好(access type preference),该参数目前可能有3个取值,分别指示3GPP,Non-3GPP和多接入(Multi-Access),当指示3GPP时,表示需要通过3GPP接入类型建立会话,当指示Non-3GPP时,表示需要通过非3GPP接入类型建立会话,当指示多接入时,表示需要通过3GPP接入类型和非3GPP接入类型同时建立会话。The routing selection component includes session and service continuity mode (SSC mode), slice information, DNN information, etc. When the UE establishes a session, the UE needs to establish the corresponding session according to the requirements of the routing selection component. Optionally, the routing selection component may include an access type preference. This parameter currently may have three values, indicating 3GPP, Non-3GPP and Multi-Access. When 3GPP is indicated, it means that the session needs to be established through the 3GPP access type. When Non-3GPP is indicated, it means that the session needs to be established through the non-3GPP access type. When multi-access is indicated, it means that the session needs to be established through both the 3GPP access type and the non-3GPP access type.
b)路由选择验证标准(route selection validation criteria):b) Route selection validation criteria:
路由选择验证标准是一个可选的参数,可以包含时间窗信息和地理位置信息,这两个参数用于验证包含该路由选择验证标准的RSD当前是否可用,只有当UE当前的时间满足时间窗信息要求,且地理位置满足地理位置信息的要求时,UE才可以按照该RSD建立对应的会话,当RSD中不包含对应的条件信息时,可认为RSD没有这些限制,UE可在任意时间和/或任意地点建立会话。The routing verification criterion is an optional parameter that may include time window information and geographic location information. These two parameters are used to verify whether the RSD containing the routing verification criterion is currently available. Only when the UE's current time meets the time window information requirements and the geographic location meets the geographic location information requirements, the UE can establish a corresponding session according to the RSD. When the RSD does not contain the corresponding conditional information, it can be considered that the RSD has no such restrictions, and the UE can establish a session at any time and/or any location.
3、漫游导引(steering of roaming,SOR):3. Steering of roaming (SOR):
SOR流程可以用于对UE的配置进行更新,如更新UE的选网列表,使得UE能够按照选网列表中指示的公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network,PLMN),选择PLMN接入。SOR流程可以分为两种,在注册流程中发起的SOR流程,在注册流程后触发的SOR流程,下面分别介绍。The SOR process can be used to update the configuration of the UE, such as updating the network selection list of the UE, so that the UE can select the public land mobile network (PLMN) to access according to the PLMN indicated in the network selection list. The SOR process can be divided into two types: the SOR process initiated during the registration process and the SOR process triggered after the registration process, which are introduced below.
如图2所示,注册流程中发起的SOR流程的具体流程如下:As shown in Figure 2, the specific process of the SOR process initiated in the registration process is as follows:
S201,UE向AMF发送注册请求(registration request)消息。S201, UE sends a registration request message to AMF.
注册请求消息携带注册类型(registration type)以及UE的标识信息。The registration request message carries the registration type and UE identification information.
注册类型有如下几种:There are several types of registration:
1)初始注册(initial registration):当UE处于去注册状态时发起的注册流程。1) Initial registration: The registration process initiated when the UE is in the deregistered state.
2)移动性注册更新(mobility registration update):当UE因移动而需要发起的注册流程。2) Mobility registration update: The registration process that needs to be initiated when the UE moves.
3)周期性注册更新(periodic registration update):当UE处于注册状态,因周期性注册更新计时器超时而发起的注册流程。3) Periodic registration update: When the UE is in the registered state, the registration process is initiated due to the expiration of the periodic registration update timer.
4)紧急注册(emergency registration):当UE处于业务受限状态时发起的注册流程。4) Emergency registration: The registration process initiated when the UE is in a service-restricted state.
UE的标识信息可以是用户隐藏标识符(subscription concealed identifier,SUCI),或5G全球唯一临时UE标识(5G globally unique temporary identifier,5G-GUTI),其由服务于该UE的AMF分配,或永久设备标识符(permanent equipment identifier,PEI)。若UE能够提供有效的5G-GUT时,则在注册请求中携带该5G-GUTI。若UE无法提供有效的5G-GUTI,则在注册请求携带SUCI。在紧急注册中,若UE无法提供有效的5G-GUTI以及无法提供SUPI(即无SUCI,SUCI是加密的SUPI),则在注册请求携带PEI。The identification information of the UE can be a subscription concealed identifier (SUCI), a 5G globally unique temporary identifier (5G-GUTI), which is allocated by the AMF serving the UE, or a permanent equipment identifier (PEI). If the UE can provide a valid 5G-GUT, the 5G-GUTI is carried in the registration request. If the UE cannot provide a valid 5G-GUTI, the SUCI is carried in the registration request. In emergency registration, if the UE cannot provide a valid 5G-GUTI and cannot provide a SUPI (i.e., no SUCI, the SUCI is an encrypted SUPI), the PEI is carried in the registration request.
S202,当AMF接收到UE的注册请求消息后,需要对UE执行鉴权。S202: After AMF receives the registration request message from the UE, it needs to authenticate the UE.
S203,AMF向UDM发送注册UE上下文请求(Nudm_UECM_Registration request)消息。S203, AMF sends a UE context registration request (Nudm_UECM_Registration request) message to UDM.
S204,UDM向AMF发送注册UE上下文响应(Nudm_UECM_Registration response)消息。S204, UDM sends a registration UE context response (Nudm_UECM_Registration response) message to AMF.
当UE的鉴权通过后,AMF向UDM注册UE上下文,即执行S203-S204。When the UE is authenticated, the AMF registers the UE context with the UDM, executing S203-S204.
S205,AMF向UDM发送签约数据获取请求(Nudm_SDM_Get request)消息。S205, AMF sends a contract data acquisition request (Nudm_SDM_Get request) message to UDM.
若AMF中没有UE的签约数据,则AMF还需要从UDM获取UE的签约数据。If the AMF does not have the UE's subscription data, the AMF also needs to obtain the UE's subscription data from the UDM.
可选地,S206a,UDM决定触发SOR流程。Optionally, in S206a, UDM decides to trigger a SOR process.
如果UE的签约信息指示能够基于UE在访问公共陆上移动网(visited public land mobile network,VPLMN)中的初始注册而触发SOR流程,则当UE在VPLMN中进行初始注册时(也即,AMF是VPLMN中的AMF,或者说V-AMF),UDM(也即家乡公共陆上移动网(home public land mobile network,HPLMN)中的UDM,或者说H-UDM)应向UE触发SOR流程。或者,UDM也可以基于运营商策略触发SOR流程。If the subscription information of the UE indicates that the SOR procedure can be triggered based on the initial registration of the UE in a visited public land mobile network (VPLMN), then when the UE performs initial registration in the VPLMN (that is, the AMF is the AMF in the VPLMN, or V-AMF), the UDM (that is, the UDM in the home public land mobile network (HPLMN), or H-UDM) shall trigger the SOR procedure to the UE. Alternatively, the UDM may also trigger the SOR procedure based on the operator policy.
可以理解,本申请实施例提到的UDM在没有特别说明时,可理解为是HPLMN中的UDM。本申请实施例提到的AMF在没有特别说明时,可理解为是VPLMN中的AMF,也可以理解为是HPLMN中的AMF,例如,如果UE注册至HPLMN,则AMF为HPLMN的AMF,若UE注册至VPLMN,则AMF为VPLMN的AMF。It can be understood that the UDM mentioned in the embodiment of the present application can be understood as the UDM in the HPLMN when there is no special explanation. The AMF mentioned in the embodiment of the present application can be understood as the AMF in the VPLMN or the AMF in the HPLMN when there is no special explanation. For example, if the UE is registered to the HPLMN, the AMF is the AMF of the HPLMN, and if the UE is registered to the VPLMN, the AMF is the AMF of the VPLMN.
可选地,S206b,UDM向漫游切换应用功能(steering of roaming application function,SOR-AF)发送SOR获取请求(Nsoraf_SoR_Get request)消息。Optionally, S206b, UDM sends a SOR get request (Nsoraf_SoR_Get request) message to the steering of roaming application function (SOR-AF).
可选地,S206c,SOR-AF向UDM发送SOR获取响应(Nsoraf_SoR_Get response)消息。Optionally, S206c, SOR-AF sends a SOR get response (Nsoraf_SoR_Get response) message to UDM.
可选地,S206d,UDM对信息进行安全验证。Optionally, S206d, UDM performs security verification on the information.
其中,如果UDM要在UE在VPLMN中执行注册时向UE提供SOR,并且不存在用于SOR-AF调用的HPLMN策略,则不执行S206b-S206c。UDM从UDR获取保存好的选网列表。如果UDM要在UE在VPLMN注册时向UE提供SOR,并且存在用于SOR-AF调用的HPLMN策略,则UDM通过S206b-S206c,从SOR-AF获取选网列表。此时,UDM从SOR-AF获取UE的选网列表后,UDM还可以执行S206d,对选网列表进行安全验证。If the UDM is to provide SOR to the UE when the UE registers in the VPLMN, and there is no HPLMN policy for SOR-AF invocation, S206b-S206c are not executed. The UDM obtains the saved network selection list from the UDR. If the UDM is to provide SOR to the UE when the UE registers in the VPLMN, and there is an HPLMN policy for SOR-AF invocation, the UDM obtains the network selection list from the SOR-AF through S206b-S206c. At this time, after the UDM obtains the UE's network selection list from the SOR-AF, the UDM can also execute S206d to perform security verification on the network selection list.
S207,UDM向AMF发送签约数据获取响应(Nudm_SDM_Get response)消息。S207, UDM sends a contract data acquisition response (Nudm_SDM_Get response) message to AMF.
当UDM确定SOR的信息(如UE的选网列表)后,UDM可以向AMF发送签约数据获取响应消息,携带UE签约数据以及该选网列表。When UDM determines the information of SOR (such as the UE's network selection list), UDM can send a subscription data acquisition response message to AMF, carrying the UE subscription data and the network selection list.
可选地,S208,AMF向UDM发送签约数据订阅请求(Nudm_SDM_Subscribe request)消息。Optionally, S208, AMF sends a contract data subscription request (Nudm_SDM_Subscribe request) message to UDM.
签约数据订阅请求消息用于指示如果UDM有关于UE的签约数据的改动时,则UDM需要按照该签约数据订阅请求消息的要求向AMF发送UE最新的签约数据。The subscription data subscription request message is used to indicate that if UDM has any changes to the UE's subscription data, UDM needs to send the UE's latest subscription data to AMF according to the requirements of the subscription data subscription request message.
S209,AMF向UE发送注册接受(registration accept)消息。S209, AMF sends a registration accept message to the UE.
AMF在注册接受消息中包含AMF接收到UE的选网列表。The AMF includes the network selection list received by the AMF from the UE in the registration acceptance message.
S210,UE向AMF发送注册完成(registration complete)消息。S210, UE sends a registration complete message to AMF.
UE对接收到的选网列表进行安全验证。若安全验证成功,且UDM不要求发送反馈消息,则UE向AMF发送注册完成消息,其中不包含SOR确认消息。如果安全验证失败,或UE配置为需要收到SOR信息,如选网列表,但是在注册接受消息中没有收到对应的选网列表,则UE向AMF发送注册完成消息,其中也不包含SOR确认消息。如果安全验证成功,且UDM要求发送反馈消息,则UE向AMF发送注册完成消息,其中包含SOR确认消息。The UE performs security verification on the received network selection list. If the security verification is successful and the UDM does not require sending a feedback message, the UE sends a registration completion message to the AMF, which does not include a SOR confirmation message. If the security verification fails, or the UE is configured to receive SOR information, such as a network selection list, but does not receive the corresponding network selection list in the registration acceptance message, the UE sends a registration completion message to the AMF, which does not include a SOR confirmation message. If the security verification is successful and the UDM requires sending a feedback message, the UE sends a registration completion message to the AMF, which includes a SOR confirmation message.
可选地,S211,AMF向UDM发送SOR确认消息。Optionally, in S211, AMF sends a SOR confirmation message to UDM.
若AMF接收到SOR确认消息,则AMF应当向UDM提供SOR确认消息。UDM接收到SOR确认消息后,UDM可以基于运营商策略或UE的签约数据中的要求,确定是否需要向SOR-AF反馈,若UDM需要向SOR-AF反馈,则UDM向SOR-AF反馈SOR确认消息。If AMF receives the SOR confirmation message, AMF shall provide the SOR confirmation message to UDM. After UDM receives the SOR confirmation message, UDM can determine whether it needs to feedback to SOR-AF based on the operator policy or the requirements in the UE's subscription data. If UDM needs to feedback to SOR-AF, UDM will feedback the SOR confirmation message to SOR-AF.
可选地,S212,UE根据接收到的选网列表,重新执行网络选择,选择高优先级的网络接入。Optionally, in S212, the UE re-executes network selection according to the received network selection list and selects a high-priority network access.
如图3所示,在注册流程后触发的SOR流程的具体流程如下:As shown in Figure 3, the specific process of the SOR process triggered after the registration process is as follows:
可选地,S301,SOR-AF向UDM发送参数提供更新请求(Nudm_ParameterProvision_Update request)消息。Optionally, S301, SOR-AF sends a parameter provision update request (Nudm_ParameterProvision_Update request) message to UDM.
若UDM支持从SOR-AF获取首选PLMN与接入技术结合(preferred PLMN/access technology combinations)的列表,也即选网列表,则SOR-AF可以向HPLMN UDM发送参数提供更新请求,以携带该选网列表。If UDM supports obtaining a list of preferred PLMN/access technology combinations (preferred PLMN/access technology combinations) from SOR-AF, that is, the network selection list, the SOR-AF can send a parameter provision update request to the HPLMN UDM to carry the network selection list.
S302,UDM向AMF发送签约数据通知Nudm_SDM_Notification)消息。S302, UDM sends a contract data notification (Nudm_SDM_Notification) message to AMF.
签约数据通知消息可以包括更新的选网列表。其中,UDM可以获取更新的选网列表(如S300中由SOR-AF发送,或从UDR获取)。UDM向AMF通知用户资料更新。可选地,该更新的选网列表信息可以被包含在漫游切换信息(steering of roaming information)中。此时,UDM可以向AMF发送签约数据通知消息,以携带该更新的选网列表。The subscription data notification message may include an updated network selection list. Among them, UDM can obtain the updated network selection list (such as sent by SOR-AF in S300, or obtained from UDR). UDM notifies AMF of the user profile update. Optionally, the updated network selection list information can be included in the roaming switching information (steering of roaming information). At this time, UDM can send a subscription data notification message to AMF to carry the updated network selection list.
S303,AMF向UE发送下行NAS传输(DL NAS Transport)消息。S303, AMF sends a downlink NAS transport (DL NAS Transport) message to the UE.
下行NAS传输消息可以包括AMF从UDM获取的信息,即AMF将从UDM获取的信息透传至UE。换言之,若UDM向AMF发送更新的选网列表,则下行NAS消息包括该选网列表。若UDM向AMF发送漫游切换信息,漫游切换信息包括更新的选网列表,则下行NAS传输消息也包括该漫游切换信息。The downlink NAS transmission message may include the information obtained by AMF from UDM, that is, AMF transparently transmits the information obtained from UDM to UE. In other words, if UDM sends an updated network selection list to AMF, the downlink NAS message includes the network selection list. If UDM sends roaming switching information to AMF, and the roaming switching information includes an updated network selection list, the downlink NAS transmission message also includes the roaming switching information.
S304,UE执行安全检查。S304: UE performs security check.
若UE接收到上述漫游切换信息或更新的选网列表,则UE需执行安全检查,确认这些信息是由HPLMN提供的。若安全检查成功,UE会将这些信息上传至用户服务识别模块(user service identity module,USIM)卡中,或者,替换UE事先存储的信息。If the UE receives the above roaming switching information or updated network selection list, the UE needs to perform a security check to confirm that the information is provided by the HPLMN. If the security check is successful, the UE will upload the information to the user service identity module (USIM) card, or replace the information previously stored by the UE.
S305,UE向AMF发送上行NAS传输(UL NAS Transport)消息。S305, UE sends an uplink NAS transport (UL NAS Transport) message to AMF.
若UDM请求UE反馈响应消息,则UE可以在上行NAS传输消息中包括该响应消息。可选地,该响应消息可以是包含于上行NAS传输消息中的漫游切换透传容器(SOR transparent container)中的消息,具体可以是签约数据信息请求(Nudm_SDM_Info request)消息。If the UDM requests the UE to feedback a response message, the UE may include the response message in the uplink NAS transmission message. Optionally, the response message may be a message in a roaming switching transparent container (SOR transparent container) included in the uplink NAS transmission message, specifically a subscription data information request (Nudm_SDM_Info request) message.
S306,AMF向UDM发送签约数据信息请求消息S306: AMF sends a subscription data information request message to UDM
UDM验证签约数据请求信息消息是由UE发送的。The UDM verification subscription data request information message is sent by the UE.
可选地,S307,UDM向SOR-AF发送签约数据信息请求(Nsoraf_SoR_Info request)消息。Optionally, S307, UDM sends a contract data information request (Nsoraf_SoR_Info request) message to SOR-AF.
若更新的选网列表是由SOR-AF提供的,则UDM可以执行S307,用以指示该选网列表已成功传输至UE。If the updated network selection list is provided by the SOR-AF, the UDM may execute S307 to indicate that the network selection list has been successfully transmitted to the UE.
4、会话建立流程:4. Session establishment process:
如图4所示,3GPP定义了会话建立流程,具体如下:As shown in Figure 4, 3GPP defines the session establishment process as follows:
S401,UE向AMF发送PDU会话建立请求消息(PDU Session Establishment Request)。PDU会话建立请求消息是NAS消息,携带有PDU会话标识(PDU session ID)、请求类型(request type)、UE请求的数据网络名称(UErequested DNN)、切片信息(S-NSSAI)等参数。S401, UE sends a PDU session establishment request message (PDU Session Establishment Request) to AMF. The PDU session establishment request message is a NAS message, carrying parameters such as PDU session identifier (PDU session ID), request type (request type), UE requested data network name (UErequested DNN), slice information (S-NSSAI), etc.
S402,AMF选择合适的SMF。S402, AMF selects a suitable SMF.
S403,AMF向SMF发送PDU会话创建会话上下文请求(Nsmf_PDUSession_CreateSMContext Request)消息。PDU会话创建会话上下文请求消息携带有UE的SUPI、PDU会话标识等参数。S403, AMF sends a PDU session creation session context request (Nsmf_PDUSession_CreateSMContext Request) message to SMF. The PDU session creation session context request message carries parameters such as UE's SUPI and PDU session identifier.
可选地,S404,SMF从UDM发送获取会话管理签约数据。签约数据可以包括是否允许建立会话的信息。Optionally, at S404, the SMF obtains session management subscription data from the UDM. The subscription data may include information on whether to allow the session to be established.
S405,SMF向AMF发送PDU会话创建会话上下文响应(Nsmf_PDUSession_CreateSMContext Response)消息。S405, SMF sends a PDU session create session context response (Nsmf_PDUSession_CreateSMContext Response) message to AMF.
可选地,S406,网络执行PDU会话鉴权或授权流程。Optionally, S406, the network executes a PDU session authentication or authorization process.
S407,SMF选择PCF。其中,若需要动态PCC规则,则SMF选择PCF,并与该PCF建立会话策略关联。例如,SMF向PCF发送策略关联建立请求(SM Policy Association Establishment Request)消息,PCF向SMF发送策略关联建立响应(SM Policy Association Establishment Response)消息。S407, SMF selects PCF. If dynamic PCC rules are required, SMF selects PCF and establishes a session policy association with the PCF. For example, SMF sends a policy association establishment request (SM Policy Association Establishment Request) message to PCF, and PCF sends a policy association establishment response (SM Policy Association Establishment Response) message to SMF.
S408,SMF选择合适的UPF。S408, SMF selects a suitable UPF.
可选地,S409,SMF向PCF发送会话策略修改(SMF initiated SM Policy Association Modification)消息。例如,如果PCF事先向SMF订阅了事件,如UE时区变更或位置变更等,则SMF可以通过会话策略修改消息向PCF上报变更信息。Optionally, at S409, SMF sends a session policy modification (SMF initiated SM Policy Association Modification) message to PCF. For example, if PCF has subscribed to events from SMF in advance, such as UE time zone change or location change, SMF can report the change information to PCF via the session policy modification message.
S410,SMF与UPF建立N4连接。具体地,如S410a,SMF向UPF发送N4会话建立/修改请求(N4 Session Establishment/Modification Request)消息,该消息包括N4规则,具体如数据包检测规则(packet detection rule,PDR)、转发动作规则(forwarding action rule,FAR)等规则。以及,如S410b,UPF向SMF发送N4会话建立/修改响应(N4 Session Establishment/Modification Response)消息。S410, SMF establishes an N4 connection with UPF. Specifically, as in S410a, SMF sends an N4 session establishment/modification request (N4 Session Establishment/Modification Request) message to UPF, which includes N4 rules, such as packet detection rule (PDR), forwarding action rule (FAR) and other rules. And, as in S410b, UPF sends an N4 session establishment/modification response (N4 Session Establishment/Modification Response) message to SMF.
S411,SMF向AMF发送N1N2消息传输(Namf_Communication_N1N2MessageTransfer)消息,此消息包含会话标识、N2接口会话管理信息(N2 SM information)以及N1接口会话管理容器(N1 SM Container)等信息。其中,N2接口会话管理信息是SMF通过AMF发给RAN的消息,N2接口会话管理信息还包含UPF的隧道端点标识等信息,用于将上行数据应发往哪(可以理解为上行数据的目的地址)告知给RAN。N1接口会话管理容器中的信息是SMF通过AMF发给UE的信息,如AMF后续通过NAS消息将此信息发给UE。S411, SMF sends a N1N2 message transfer (Namf_Communication_N1N2MessageTransfer) message to AMF, which contains information such as session identifier, N2 interface session management information (N2 SM information) and N1 interface session management container (N1 SM Container). Among them, N2 interface session management information is a message sent by SMF to RAN through AMF. N2 interface session management information also contains information such as the tunnel endpoint identifier of UPF, which is used to inform RAN where the uplink data should be sent (which can be understood as the destination address of the uplink data). The information in the N1 interface session management container is the information sent by SMF to UE through AMF, and AMF will subsequently send this information to UE through NAS message.
S412,AMF向RAN发送N2 PDU会话请求(N2 PDU Session Request)消息,该消息携带N2接口会话管理信息,以及需要发给UE的NAS消息,该NAS消息包括会话标识以及N1接口会话管理容器。S412, AMF sends an N2 PDU Session Request message to RAN, which carries the N2 interface session management information and the NAS message that needs to be sent to the UE. The NAS message includes the session identifier and the N1 interface session management container.
S413,RAN与UE建立空口资源,例如,RAN将上述的NAS消息发送给UE,该NAS消息还可以携带了PDU会话建立接受消息。S413, RAN establishes air interface resources with the UE. For example, RAN sends the above NAS message to the UE. The NAS message may also carry a PDU session establishment accept message.
S414,RAN向AMF发送N2 PDU会话响应(N2 PDU Session Response)消息,该消息携带RAN侧的隧道端点标识,也即,AN隧道端点标识信息。S414, RAN sends an N2 PDU Session Response message to AMF, which carries the tunnel endpoint identifier on the RAN side, that is, the AN tunnel endpoint identifier information.
S415,AMF向SMF发送PDU会话更新会话上下文请求(Nsmf_PDUSession_UpdateSMContext Request)消息,该消息携带AN隧道端点标识信息。S415, AMF sends a PDU session update session context request (Nsmf_PDUSession_UpdateSMContext Request) message to SMF, which carries the AN tunnel endpoint identification information.
S416,SMF通过N4会话修改流程将AN隧道端点标识信息发送给UPF。例如,S416a,SMF向UPF发送N4会话修改请求消息,该消息包括AN隧道端点标识信息,以将下行数据应发到哪告知给UPF。以及,S416b,UPF向SMF发送N4会话修改响应消息。S416, SMF sends the AN tunnel endpoint identification information to UPF through the N4 session modification process. For example, S416a, SMF sends an N4 session modification request message to UPF, which includes the AN tunnel endpoint identification information to inform UPF where the downlink data should be sent. And, S416b, UPF sends an N4 session modification response message to SMF.
S417,SMF向AMF发送PDU会话更新会话上下文响应(Nsmf_PDUSession_UpdateSMContext Response)消息。S417, SMF sends a PDU session update session context response (Nsmf_PDUSession_UpdateSMContext Response) message to AMF.
5、3GPP的连接架构:5. 3GPP connection architecture:
如图5所示,现有的3GPP架构支持UE同时通过3GPP接入类型(3GPP access type)和非3GPP接入类型(N3GPP access type)接入网络。所谓3GPP接入类型,即接入网的接入类型为3GPP接入类型。3GPP接入类型可以包括以下接入技术:LTE(对应4G蜂窝网络)、NR(对应5G蜂窝网络),也可以是3GPP定义的卫星接入方式,包括低轨道卫星、中轨道卫星、同步卫星等。非3GPP接入类型包括非可信非3GPP接入技术(untrusted non-3GPP access),例如,通过个人购买的无线接入节点接入核心网、可信非3GPP接入技术(trusted non-3GPP access),例如,通过运营商部署的无线接入节点接入核心网、有线接入技术(wireline access)。非3GPP接入类型可以是无线保真(WiFi)、蓝牙、ZigBee等方式。As shown in FIG5 , the existing 3GPP architecture supports UE to access the network through both 3GPP access type (3GPP access type) and non-3GPP access type (N3GPP access type). The so-called 3GPP access type means that the access type of the access network is 3GPP access type. 3GPP access type can include the following access technologies: LTE (corresponding to 4G cellular network), NR (corresponding to 5G cellular network), or satellite access methods defined by 3GPP, including low-orbit satellites, medium-orbit satellites, synchronous satellites, etc. Non-3GPP access types include untrusted non-3GPP access technologies (untrusted non-3GPP access), for example, accessing the core network through wireless access nodes purchased by individuals, trusted non-3GPP access technologies (trusted non-3GPP access), for example, accessing the core network through wireless access nodes deployed by operators, and wireline access technologies (wireline access). Non-3GPP access types can be wireless fidelity (WiFi), Bluetooth, ZigBee, etc.
6、网络选择:6. Network selection:
当UE想要获取接入网络获取服务前,首先要进行网络选择,选择合适的网络进行注册后,UE才能正常的获取服务。When the UE wants to obtain access to the network to obtain services, it must first select a network. After selecting a suitable network for registration, the UE can obtain services normally.
目前3GPP对网络选择的定义如下:Currently, 3GPP defines network selection as follows:
首先,当UE开机后,先判断UE是否有用户识别模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)卡,若UE没有SIM卡,或UE的SIM卡不可用,则UE处于NO SIM状态,此时需要等待SIM卡可用才可以进行网络选择。First, when the UE is turned on, it is determined whether the UE has a subscriber identity module (SIM) card. If the UE does not have a SIM card or the UE's SIM card is unavailable, the UE is in the NO SIM state. At this time, it is necessary to wait for the SIM card to be available before selecting a network.
若UE当前SIM卡可用,则UE需要判断是否有RPLMN(register PLMN),即上一次注册过的PLMN,当UE具有RPLMN时,会优先尝试从RPLMN发起注册,RPLMN的信息可以保存在SIM卡中或保存在UE中。If the current SIM card of the UE is available, the UE needs to determine whether there is an RPLMN (register PLMN), that is, the PLMN that was registered last time. When the UE has an RPLMN, it will try to initiate registration from the RPLMN first. The information of the RPLMN can be saved in the SIM card or in the UE.
若UE选择RPLMN,则会向RPLMN尝试注册,若注册失败则会根据选网列表进行选网,若注册成功,则指示选择的PLMN是什么PLMN并进入在网(ON PLMN)状态。If the UE selects RPLMN, it will try to register with the RPLMN. If the registration fails, it will select a network based on the network selection list. If the registration is successful, it will indicate which PLMN is selected and enter the ON PLMN state.
若UE没有RPLMN,或RPLMN注册失败,则会按照选网列表进行网络选择,根据选网列表的优先级依次尝试注册,若注册成功,则进入在网状态,若注册失败,并且选网列表中还有剩下的网络没有尝试,则继续按照选网列表尝试注册,若注册失败且选网列表中没有网络可以选择,则UE判断当前是否有可用的PLMN,若有则尝试注册,若没有则进入等待状态。If the UE does not have RPLMN, or RPLMN registration fails, it will select a network according to the network selection list, and try to register in order according to the priority of the network selection list. If the registration is successful, it will enter the online state. If the registration fails, and there are still networks in the network selection list that have not been tried, it will continue to try to register according to the network selection list. If the registration fails and there is no network to be selected in the network selection list, the UE will determine whether there is an available PLMN. If so, it will try to register. If not, it will enter the waiting state.
当UE处于在网状态时,存在几种情况可能会触发网络重选:When the UE is online, there are several situations that may trigger network reselection:
若UE当前接入的是VPLMN,UE会定期执行网络重选,当一个周期结束后,UE会搜索更高优先级的网络,若没有更高优先级的网络出现,则维持当前的在网状态,若有更高优先级的网络出现,则UE选择更高优先级的网络尝试接入。If the UE is currently connected to a VPLMN, the UE will periodically perform network reselection. When a cycle ends, the UE will search for a network with a higher priority. If no network with a higher priority appears, the UE will maintain the current online state. If a network with a higher priority appears, the UE will select the network with a higher priority and try to access it.
当UE当前接入的网络失去覆盖时,UE会判断当前是否有可用的网络接入,如果存在可用的网络,则按照优先级选择网络,如果没有则进入等待状态,若上一次注册的网络此时可用,则UE恢复在网状态,若出现其他可用的网络,则UE按照优先级选网接入。When the network currently accessed by the UE loses coverage, the UE will determine whether there is an available network access. If there is an available network, the network will be selected according to priority. If not, the UE will enter a waiting state. If the last registered network is available at this time, the UE will resume the online state. If other available networks appear, the UE will select the network access according to priority.
用户可以手动触发网络重选,此时UE将上一次注册的网络加入暂时禁止的列表,然后按照选网列表重新选择网络。The user can manually trigger network reselection. At this time, the UE adds the last registered network to the temporarily banned list, and then reselects a network according to the network selection list.
若UE收到了禁止漫游的指示,且UE当前接入的是VPLMN,则需要触发UE网络重选。If the UE receives a roaming prohibition indication and the UE is currently connected to a VPLMN, it is necessary to trigger UE network reselection.
可以看出,在现有的网络选择技术中,UE通常只会在一个网络中获取服务,当UE选择好一个网络并成功注册之后,UE处于在网状态,若UE触发重选网,则UE会选择一个新的网络替换当前网络,UE无法同时接入两个或两个以上的网络,无法适用未来更多更灵活的通信需求。It can be seen that in the existing network selection technology, the UE usually only obtains services in one network. After the UE selects a network and successfully registers, the UE is in the network state. If the UE triggers network reselection, the UE will select a new network to replace the current network. The UE cannot access two or more networks at the same time, and cannot adapt to more flexible communication needs in the future.
针对上述技术问题,本申请实施例提出了如下技术方案。In response to the above technical problems, the embodiments of the present application propose the following technical solutions.
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
在本申请实施例中,“指示”可以包括直接指示和间接指示,也可以包括显式指示和隐式指示。将某一信息所指示的信息称为待指示信息,则具体实现过程中,对待指示信息进行指示的方式有很多种,例如但不限于,可以直接指示待指示信息,如待指示信息本身或者该待指示信息的索引等。也可以通过指示其他信息来间接指示待指示信息,其中该其他信息与待指示信息之间存在关联关系。还可以仅仅指示待指示信息的一部分,而待指示信息的其他部分则是已知的或者提前约定的。例如,还可以借助预先约定(例如协议规定)的各个信息的排列顺序来实现对特定信息的指示,从而在一定程度上降低指示开销。同时,还可以识别各个信息的通用部分并统一指示,以降低单独指示同样的信息而带来的指示开销。In the embodiments of the present application, "indication" may include direct indication and indirect indication, and may also include explicit indication and implicit indication. The information indicated by a certain information is called information to be indicated. In the specific implementation process, there are many ways to indicate the information to be indicated, such as but not limited to, the information to be indicated can be directly indicated, such as the information to be indicated itself or the index of the information to be indicated. The information to be indicated can also be indirectly indicated by indicating other information, wherein there is an association between the other information and the information to be indicated. It is also possible to indicate only a part of the information to be indicated, while the other parts of the information to be indicated are known or agreed in advance. For example, the indication of specific information can also be achieved by means of the arrangement order of each piece of information agreed in advance (for example, specified by the protocol), thereby reducing the indication overhead to a certain extent. At the same time, the common parts of each piece of information can also be identified and indicated uniformly to reduce the indication overhead caused by indicating the same information separately.
此外,具体的指示方式还可以是现有各种指示方式,例如但不限于,上述指示方式及其各种组合等。各种指示方式的具体细节可以参考现有技术,本文不再赘述。由上文所述可知,举例来说,当需要指示相同类型的多个信息时,可能会出现不同信息的指示方式不相同的情形。具体实现过程中,可以根据具体的需要选择所需的指示方式,本申请实施例对选择的指示方式不做限定,如此一来,本申请实施例涉及的指示方式应理解为涵盖可以使得待指示方获知待指示信息的各种方法。In addition, the specific indication method may also be various existing indication methods, such as but not limited to the above-mentioned indication methods and various combinations thereof. The specific details of the various indication methods can refer to the prior art and will not be repeated herein. As can be seen from the above, for example, when it is necessary to indicate multiple information of the same type, different indication methods may be used for different information. In the specific implementation process, the desired indication method can be selected according to specific needs. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the selected indication method. In this way, the indication method involved in the embodiment of the present application should be understood to cover various methods that can enable the party to be indicated to obtain the information to be indicated.
应理解,待指示信息可以作为一个整体一起发送,也可以分成多个子信息分开发送,而且这些子信息的发送周期和/或发送时机可以相同,也可以不同。具体发送方法本申请实施例不进行限定。其中,这些子信息的发送周期和/或发送时机可以是预先定义的,例如根据协议预先定义的,也可以是发送端设备通过向接收端设备发送配置信息来配置的。It should be understood that the information to be indicated can be sent as a whole, or divided into multiple sub-information and sent separately, and the sending period and/or sending time of these sub-information can be the same or different. The specific sending method is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. Among them, the sending period and/or sending time of these sub-information can be pre-defined, for example, pre-defined according to a protocol, or can be configured by the sending end device by sending configuration information to the receiving end device.
本申请中“发送信息”可以理解为一个设备向另一个设备发送信息,或者,也可以理解为设备内部的一个逻辑模块向另一个逻辑模块发送信息。例如,“网络设备发送信息”可以理解为网设备向另一个设备(如终端或其他网络设备)发送信息,或者,可以理解为网络设备中的逻辑模块1向网络设备中的逻辑模块2发送信息。In this application, "sending information" can be understood as one device sending information to another device, or it can also be understood as a logic module inside a device sending information to another logic module. For example, "a network device sending information" can be understood as a network device sending information to another device (such as a terminal or other network device), or it can be understood as logic module 1 in a network device sending information to logic module 2 in a network device.
本申请中“接收信息”可以理解为一个设备接收来自另一个设备的信息,或者,也可以理解为设备内部的一个逻辑模块接收来自另一个逻辑模块的信息。例如,“网络设备接收信息”可以理解为网络设备接收来自另一个设备(如终端或其他网络设备)的信息,或者,可以理解为网络设备中的逻辑模块1接收来自网络设备中的逻辑模块2的信息。In this application, "receiving information" can be understood as a device receiving information from another device, or it can also be understood as a logic module inside a device receiving information from another logic module. For example, "a network device receiving information" can be understood as a network device receiving information from another device (such as a terminal or other network device), or it can be understood as logic module 1 in a network device receiving information from logic module 2 in the network device.
本申请中“向…(例如终端)发送信息”或者附图中的相关示意可以理解为该信息的目的端是终端。可以包括直接或间接的向终端发送信息。“从…(例如终端)接收信息”或者“接收来自…(例如终端)的信息”或者“接收(例如终端)发送的信息”,或者附图中的相关示意可以理解为该信息的源端是终端,可以包括直接或间接的从终端接收信息。信息在信息发送的源端和目的端之间可能会被进行必要的处理,例如格式变化等,但目的端可以理解来自源端的有效信息。本申请中类似的表述可以做类似的理解,在此不再赘述。In this application, "sending information to... (for example, a terminal)" or the related illustrations in the accompanying drawings can be understood as the destination end of the information is the terminal. It can include sending information to the terminal directly or indirectly. "Receiving information from... (for example, a terminal)" or "receiving information from... (for example, a terminal)" or "receiving information sent by (for example, a terminal)", or the related illustrations in the accompanying drawings can be understood as the source end of the information is the terminal, which can include directly or indirectly receiving information from the terminal. The information may be processed as necessary between the source end and the destination end of the information transmission, such as format changes, etc., but the destination end can understand the valid information from the source end. Similar expressions in this application can be understood similarly and will not be repeated here.
“预先定义”或“预先配置”可以通过在设备中预先保存相应的代码、表格或其他可用于指示相关信息的方式来实现,本申请实施例对于其具体的实现方式不做限定。其中,“保存”可以是指,保存在一个或者多个存储器中。所述一个或者多个存储器可以是单独的设置,也可以是集成在编码器或者译码器,处理器、或通信装置中。所述一个或者多个存储器也可以是一部分单独设置,一部分集成在译码器、处理器、或通信装置中。存储器的类型可以是任意形式的存储介质,本申请实施例并不对此限定。"Pre-definition" or "pre-configuration" can be implemented by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other methods that can be used to indicate relevant information in the device, and the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific implementation method. Among them, "saving" can mean saving in one or more memories. The one or more memories can be set separately or integrated in an encoder or decoder, a processor, or a communication device. The one or more memories can also be partially set separately and partially integrated in a decoder, a processor, or a communication device. The type of memory can be any form of storage medium, which is not limited by the embodiments of the present application.
本申请实施例中涉及的“协议”可以是指通信领域中协议族、类似协议族帧结构的标准协议、或者应用于未来的通信系统中的相关协议,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。The "protocol" involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to a protocol family in the communication field, a standard protocol with a similar protocol family frame structure, or a related protocol used in future communication systems, and the embodiments of the present application do not make specific limitations on this.
本申请实施例中,“当……时”、“在……的情况下”、“若”以及“如果”等描述均指在某种客观情况下设备会做出相应的处理,并非是限定时间,且也不要求设备在实现时一定要有判断的动作,也不意味着存在其它限定。In the embodiments of the present application, descriptions such as "when...", "in the case of...", "if" and "if" all mean that the device will make corresponding processing under certain objective circumstances. It does not limit the time, nor does it require the device to have a judgment action when implementing it, nor does it mean that there are other limitations.
在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示前后关联的对象是一种“或”的关系,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;本申请实施例中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况,其中A、B可以是单数或者复数。并且,在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a、b或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。另外,为了便于清楚描述本申请实施例的技术方案,在本申请的实施例中,采用了“第一”、“第二”等字样对功能和作用基本相同的相同项或相似项进行区分。本领域技术人员可以理解“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定,并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。同时,在本申请实施例中,“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请实施例中被描述为“示例性的”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其它实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言,使用“示例性的”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念,便于理解。In the description of the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise specified, "/" indicates that the objects associated before and after are in an "or" relationship, for example, A/B can represent A or B; "and/or" in the embodiments of the present application is only a description of the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B can represent: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A and B can be singular or plural. In addition, in the description of the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise specified, "multiple" refers to two or more than two. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of single items or plural items. For example, at least one of a, b or c can represent: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, c can be single or multiple. In addition, in order to facilitate the clear description of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, in the embodiments of the present application, the words "first", "second" and the like are used to distinguish the same items or similar items with substantially the same functions and effects. Those skilled in the art will understand that the words "first", "second" and the like do not limit the quantity and execution order, and the words "first", "second" and the like do not necessarily limit the differences. At the same time, in the embodiments of the present application, the words "exemplary" or "for example" are used to indicate examples, illustrations or explanations. Any embodiment or design described as "exemplary" or "for example" in the embodiments of the present application should not be interpreted as being more preferred or more advantageous than other embodiments or design solutions. Specifically, the use of words such as "exemplary" or "for example" is intended to present related concepts in a concrete manner for ease of understanding.
本申请实施例描述的网络架构以及业务场景是为了更加清楚的说明本申请实施例的技术方案,并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限定,本领域普通技术人员可知,随着网络架构的演变和新业务场景的出现,本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题,同样适用。The network architecture and business scenarios described in the embodiments of the present application are intended to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, and do not constitute a limitation on the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application. A person of ordinary skill in the art can appreciate that with the evolution of the network architecture and the emergence of new business scenarios, the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to similar technical problems.
为便于理解本申请实施例,首先以通信系统为例详细说明适用于本申请实施例的通信系统。To facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, a communication system applicable to the embodiments of the present application is first described in detail by taking a communication system as an example.
图6和图7为通信系统的架构示意图,如图6和图7所示,该通信系统主要包括:网络设备与终端。FIG6 and FIG7 are schematic diagrams of the architecture of the communication system. As shown in FIG6 and FIG7 , the communication system mainly includes: network equipment and terminals.
该通信系统10包括无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)100和核心网(core network,CN)200。网络设备具体可以是核心网200中网元。网络设备可以是数据管理网元,如5G中的UDM,或者在未来的通信系统,也可以是任何用于实现数据的管理或存储等相关功能的网元/功能/实体,对此不做具体限制。网络设备也可以是策略控制网元,如PCF,或者在未来的通信系统,也可以是任何用于实现策略的管理或控制等相关功能的网元/功能/实体,对此不做具体限制。或者,网络设备还可以是接入和移动性管理网元,如AMF,或者在未来的通信系统,也可以是任何用于实现接入和移动性管理等相关功能的网元/功能/实体,对此不做具体限制。The communication system 10 includes a radio access network (RAN) 100 and a core network (CN) 200. The network device may specifically be a network element in the core network 200. The network device may be a data management network element, such as UDM in 5G, or in a future communication system, it may be any network element/function/entity used to implement data management or storage and other related functions, without specific restrictions. The network device may also be a policy control network element, such as PCF, or in a future communication system, it may be any network element/function/entity used to implement policy management or control and other related functions, without specific restrictions. Alternatively, the network device may also be an access and mobility management network element, such as AMF, or in a future communication system, it may be any network element/function/entity used to implement access and mobility management and other related functions, without specific restrictions.
终端也可以称为终端设备、用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台、移动终端等。终端可以广泛应用于各种场景,例如,设备到设备(device-to-device,D2D)、车物(vehicle to everything,V2X)通信、机器类通信(machine-type communication,MTC)、物联网(internet of things,IOT)、虚拟现实、增强现实、工业控制、自动驾驶、远程医疗、智能电网、智能家具、智能办公、智能穿戴、智能交通、智慧城市等。终端可以是手机、平板电脑、带无线收发功能的电脑、可穿戴设备、车辆、无人机、直升机、飞机、轮船、机器人、机械臂、智能家居设备等。本申请的实施例对终端的设备形态不做限定。The terminal may also be referred to as a terminal device, user equipment (UE), mobile station, mobile terminal, etc. The terminal can be widely used in various scenarios, for example, device-to-device (D2D), vehicle-to-everything (V2X) communication, machine-type communication (MTC), Internet of Things (IOT), virtual reality, augmented reality, industrial control, automatic driving, telemedicine, smart grid, smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, smart city, etc. The terminal may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a computer with wireless transceiver function, a wearable device, a vehicle, a drone, a helicopter, an airplane, a ship, a robot, a mechanical arm, a smart home device, etc. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the device form of the terminal.
终端还可以理解为拥有多个签约数据的终端设备,该终端设备可以有多个SIM卡模块,每一个模块可以对应一个签约数据,签约数据之间存在关联关系,例如两个签约数据可以关联到同一个用户。终端可以是一个拥有多个SIM卡的用户设备,也可以是集成了多套用户设备的系统,其中每套用户设备都具有SIM卡模块和通信模块,可以与网络之间建立连接。The terminal can also be understood as a terminal device with multiple contract data. The terminal device can have multiple SIM card modules, each module can correspond to a contract data, and there is an association between the contract data. For example, two contract data can be associated with the same user. The terminal can be a user device with multiple SIM cards, or a system that integrates multiple sets of user devices, each of which has a SIM card module and a communication module, and can establish a connection with the network.
在通信系统中,终端与网络之间可以建立多连接。多连接要求终端能够同时通过多个3GPP接入类型的连接分别接入多个网络,也即,同时与多个网络分别建立3GPP接入类型的连接。以多连接是双连接为例,在未来的网络演进过程中,由于对带宽或覆盖范围的进一步需求,可能需要终端同时通过两个3GPP接入类型的连接接入网络。此时,双连接可能存在多种无线接入技术类型的组合,例如,地面网络(terrestrial network,TN)+TN,或者TN+非地面网络(non-terrestrial network,NTN),或者在未来6G网络应用后,双连接也可以是不同制式的网络组合,如5G+6G或6G+卫星等等组合。In a communication system, multiple connections can be established between a terminal and a network. Multiple connections require that a terminal can access multiple networks through multiple 3GPP access type connections at the same time, that is, establish 3GPP access type connections with multiple networks at the same time. Taking dual connection as an example, in the future network evolution process, due to further requirements for bandwidth or coverage, the terminal may need to access the network through two 3GPP access type connections at the same time. At this time, dual connection may have a combination of multiple wireless access technology types, for example, terrestrial network (TN) + TN, or TN + non-terrestrial network (NTN), or after the application of 6G network in the future, dual connection can also be a combination of networks of different standards, such as 5G + 6G or 6G + satellite, etc.
可以理解,多连接也可以替换表述为:支持双(或者多)无线能力(dual/Multiple radio capability),支持双(或者多)3GPP接入技术(Dual/Multiple 3GPP RAT),支持双(或者多)分流能力(Dual/Multiple steer),支持双(或者多)3GPP接入(Dual/Multiple 3GPP),支持双(或者多)3GPP接入类型(Dual/Multiple 3GPP access type),支持双(或者多)注册(Dual/Multiple Registration),支持相同接入类型(same access type),支持相同接入技术(same RAT),支持相同接入网络(same access network)等,换言之,支持上述的一项或多项可以理解为是能够建立多连接。It can be understood that multi-connection can also be replaced by: supporting dual (or multiple) wireless capabilities (dual/Multiple radio capability), supporting dual (or multiple) 3GPP access technology (Dual/Multiple 3GPP RAT), supporting dual (or multiple) steer capabilities (Dual/Multiple steer), supporting dual (or multiple) 3GPP access (Dual/Multiple 3GPP), supporting dual (or multiple) 3GPP access types (Dual/Multiple 3GPP access type), supporting dual (or multiple) registrations (Dual/Multiple Registration), supporting the same access type (same access type), supporting the same access technology (same RAT), supporting the same access network (same access network), etc. In other words, supporting one or more of the above can be understood as the ability to establish multiple connections.
终端与网络之间建立多连接还可以理解为,终端设备通过拥有的多个签约数据分别与网络建立连接,以多连接是双连接为例,一个终端设备拥有两个SIM卡模块,每个SIM卡模块对应一个签约数据,终端设备通过两个SIM卡模块分别与网络建立连接,或者,一个终端设备拥有两个签约数据(例如两个SUPI),终端设备通过两个签约数据分别接入网络(或者与网络建立连接),或者,一个终端设备中集成了两套用户设备,每一套用户设备拥有一个签约数据,并且每一套用户设备都与网络建立连接,此时终端设备整体与网络建立了两个连接,此时可以认为终端设备与网络建立了双连接。Establishing multiple connections between the terminal and the network can also be understood as the terminal device establishing connections with the network respectively through the multiple contract data it possesses. Taking multi-connection as dual connection as an example, a terminal device has two SIM card modules, each SIM card module corresponds to a contract data, and the terminal device establishes connections with the network respectively through the two SIM card modules, or a terminal device has two contract data (for example, two SUPIs), and the terminal device accesses the network (or establishes a connection with the network) respectively through the two contract data, or a terminal device integrates two sets of user devices, each set of user equipment has a contract data, and each set of user equipment is connected to the network. At this time, the terminal device as a whole establishes two connections with the network. At this time, it can be considered that the terminal device has established a dual connection with the network.
在通信系统中,触发建立多连接的方式可以有多种,具体如下。In a communication system, there may be multiple ways to trigger the establishment of multiple connections, as follows.
1)通过网络列表触发:1) Trigger via network list:
参考现有的SOR流程,可以认为,当网络为终端下发新的网络列表(或者说选网列表)时,可以触发终端建立多连接。为区别于以现有的选网列表,该新的网络列表可以是专门用于建立多连接的选网列表,其可以通过额外的指示或者网络列表的名称与现有的选网列表区分。Referring to the existing SOR process, it can be considered that when the network sends a new network list (or network selection list) to the terminal, it can trigger the terminal to establish multiple connections. To distinguish it from the existing network selection list, the new network list can be a network selection list specifically used to establish multiple connections, which can be distinguished from the existing network selection list by additional instructions or the name of the network list.
例如,终端可以在注册流程中触发SOR流程,以通过SOR流程将网络列表下发给终端。For example, the terminal may trigger the SOR process during the registration process, so that the network list is sent to the terminal through the SOR process.
在终端的注册流程中,终端可以主动上报自己的能力信息,如终端是否支持多连接。或者,在终端的注册流程中,数据管理网元可以根据终端的签约数据确定网络是否能为终端提供多连接的服务,也即,终端是否签约了多连接的服务。或者,在终端的注册流程中,数据管理网元可以根据终端请求的网络切片是否需要多连接的服务。在此基础上,如果满足如下至少一项:终端支持多连接、终端签约了多连接的服务、或者终端请求的网络切片需要多连接的服务,且终端的签约数据表示终端当前还未建立多连接,则数据管理网元可以通过注册流程中的SOR流程将网络列表发送给终端,用以触发终端建立多连接。例如,终端可以网络列表进行网络选择,从而保证接入当前的网络的同时,还接入从网络列表中的选择的网络,实现建立多连接。In the registration process of the terminal, the terminal can actively report its capability information, such as whether the terminal supports multiple connections. Alternatively, in the registration process of the terminal, the data management network element can determine whether the network can provide multiple connection services for the terminal based on the contract data of the terminal, that is, whether the terminal has signed a contract for multiple connection services. Alternatively, in the registration process of the terminal, the data management network element can determine whether the network slice requested by the terminal requires multiple connection services. On this basis, if at least one of the following is met: the terminal supports multiple connections, the terminal has signed a contract for multiple connection services, or the network slice requested by the terminal requires multiple connection services, and the contract data of the terminal indicates that the terminal has not currently established multiple connections, the data management network element can send the network list to the terminal through the SOR process in the registration process to trigger the terminal to establish multiple connections. For example, the terminal can select a network from the network list to ensure that while accessing the current network, it also accesses the network selected from the network list to establish multiple connections.
可选地,数据管理网元还可以通过SOR流程将建立多连接的策略告知给终端,如多连接的无线接入技术类型组合、允许建立多连接的时间和/或区域等。如果数据管理网元未将多连接的策略告知给终端,则表示网络对终端建立多连接没有策略限制,终端可以自行决策建立多连接。Optionally, the data management network element may also inform the terminal of the strategy for establishing multiple connections through the SOR process, such as the combination of wireless access technology types for multiple connections, the time and/or area where multiple connections are allowed to be established, etc. If the data management network element does not inform the terminal of the strategy for multiple connections, it means that the network has no policy restrictions on the terminal establishing multiple connections, and the terminal can decide to establish multiple connections on its own.
又例如,终端可在注册流程之后触发SOR流程,以通过SOR流程将网络列表下发给终端。For another example, the terminal may trigger the SOR process after the registration process, so as to send the network list to the terminal through the SOR process.
考虑到终端建立多连接可以不需要和终端的注册流程绑定,在终端正常完成注册流程之后,数据管理网元在任何可能的时间点触发SOR流程,将网络列表发送给终端,用以触发终端建立多连接。例如,数据管理网元可以在满足某些预设条件(如终端移动需要建立多连接的区域内和/或当前是需要建立多连接的时间),且终端当前还未建立多连接的情况下,通过SOR流程将网络列表发送给终端。Considering that the establishment of multiple connections by the terminal does not need to be bound to the registration process of the terminal, after the terminal normally completes the registration process, the data management network element triggers the SOR process at any possible time point and sends the network list to the terminal to trigger the terminal to establish multiple connections. For example, the data management network element can send the network list to the terminal through the SOR process when certain preset conditions are met (such as the terminal is moving within the area where multiple connections need to be established and/or it is currently the time when multiple connections need to be established) and the terminal has not currently established multiple connections.
2)通过指示触发:2) Triggered by indication:
在上述“通过网络列表触发”的方式中,网络列表本就具备指示终端需要建立多连接的功能,或者说,网络列表可以用于隐含指示终端需要建立多连接,换言之,该方式是适用于建立多连接需要下发用于建立多连接的网络列表的情况,或者说,建立多连接存在一个前提假设,即终端需要根据下发的网络列表进行网络选择,并接入选择的网络,从而建立多连接。若终端建立多连接不需要新的网络列表,或者说,终端不需要动态下发网络列表,如终端在本地预配有用于建立多连接的网络列表,则数据管理网元无需向终端下发网络列表,可以仅通过向终端下发指示来触发终端建立多连接,或者终端自行决定触发建立多连接。In the above-mentioned "triggering by network list" method, the network list has the function of indicating that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, or the network list can be used to implicitly indicate that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections. In other words, this method is suitable for situations where it is necessary to send a network list for establishing multiple connections to establish multiple connections, or in other words, there is a premise assumption for establishing multiple connections, that is, the terminal needs to select a network based on the sent network list and access the selected network to establish multiple connections. If the terminal does not need a new network list to establish multiple connections, or in other words, the terminal does not need to dynamically send a network list, such as the terminal is pre-equipped with a network list for establishing multiple connections locally, then the data management network element does not need to send a network list to the terminal, and can trigger the terminal to establish multiple connections only by sending instructions to the terminal, or the terminal decides to trigger the establishment of multiple connections on its own.
例如,数据管理网元可以在决定终端需要建立多连接,如终端移动需要建立多连接的区域内和/或当前是需要建立多连接的时间,且终端当前还未建立多连接的情况下,向终端发送指示,触发终端建立多连接。For example, the data management network element may send an indication to the terminal to trigger the terminal to establish multiple connections when it determines that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, such as when the terminal moves within an area where multiple connections need to be established and/or it is currently a time when multiple connections need to be established, and the terminal has not currently established multiple connections.
又例如,终端可以给用户提供开启或关闭多连接的功能。若用户操作开启多连接,则终端可以响应用户的操作,自行决定触发建立多连接。之后,若用户操作关闭多连接,则终端可以响应用户的操作,触发释放多连接,恢复到与网络建立单连接,也即,与一个网络建立3GPP接入类型或者非3GPP接入类型的连接。For another example, the terminal may provide the user with a function to turn on or off multiple connections. If the user turns on multiple connections, the terminal may respond to the user's operation and decide on its own to trigger the establishment of multiple connections. Afterwards, if the user turns off multiple connections, the terminal may respond to the user's operation, trigger the release of multiple connections, and restore to a single connection with the network, that is, to establish a 3GPP access type or non-3GPP access type connection with one network.
3)通过业务触发:3) Triggered by business:
由于多连接相比于单连接,其中一个优势就在于可以获得更大的带宽,因此建立多连接也可以由业务触发。One of the advantages of multiple connections over a single connection is that a larger bandwidth can be obtained. Therefore, the establishment of multiple connections can also be triggered by business.
例如,当终端使用某些特定业务时,若该业务对带宽要求高,则终端可以触发建立多连接,以获取更大的带宽。For example, when a terminal uses certain specific services, if the service has high bandwidth requirements, the terminal can trigger the establishment of multiple connections to obtain a larger bandwidth.
终端可以基于策略信息触发终端建立多连接。策略信息可以是URSP规则,或者任何可能的路由规则或者策略,对此不做限定。URSP规则可以进行增强,包含建立多连接的指示以及建立多连接的策略。当终端确定需要为某个业务(可能是对带宽要求高的业务)建立会话时,若该业务匹配到该URSP规则,则终端根据该URSP规则的指示触发建立多连接。或者,终端在建立会话的过程中,可以向数据管理网元或策略控制网元上报终端的会话对应的单网络切片选择协助信息(single network slice selection assistance information,S-NSSAI)和数据网络名称(data network name,DNN)。若S-NSSAI和DNN对应的业务是需要建立多连接的业务,则数据管理网元或策略控制网元可以指示终端建立多连接。The terminal can trigger the terminal to establish multiple connections based on policy information. The policy information can be a URSP rule, or any possible routing rule or policy, which is not limited. The URSP rule can be enhanced to include instructions for establishing multiple connections and policies for establishing multiple connections. When the terminal determines that a session needs to be established for a certain service (which may be a service with high bandwidth requirements), if the service matches the URSP rule, the terminal triggers the establishment of multiple connections according to the instructions of the URSP rule. Alternatively, during the process of establishing a session, the terminal can report the single network slice selection assistance information (S-NSSAI) and data network name (DNN) corresponding to the terminal's session to the data management network element or the policy control network element. If the service corresponding to the S-NSSAI and DNN is a service that requires the establishment of multiple connections, the data management network element or the policy control network element can instruct the terminal to establish multiple connections.
又例如,当前网络能提供的带宽无法满足终端的业务需求时,网络可以决定触发终端建立多连接,以获取更大的带宽。For another example, when the bandwidth currently provided by the network cannot meet the service requirements of the terminal, the network may decide to trigger the terminal to establish multiple connections to obtain a larger bandwidth.
若接入网设备发现无法保障终端的业务,如接入网设备能够提供的带宽无法满足业务对带宽的需求,则接入网设备可以通过接入和移动性管理网元向数据管理网元上报这一情况。或者,若接入和移动性管理网元发现无法保障终端的业务,如终端当前移动到低信号区域,其信号质量无法保障业务,则接入和移动性管理网元可以向数据管理网元上报这一情况。如此,数据管理网元可以指示终端建立多连接。If the access network device finds that it cannot guarantee the service of the terminal, such as the bandwidth that the access network device can provide cannot meet the bandwidth requirements of the service, the access network device can report this situation to the data management network element through the access and mobility management network element. Alternatively, if the access and mobility management network element finds that it cannot guarantee the service of the terminal, such as the terminal currently moves to a low signal area and its signal quality cannot guarantee the service, the access and mobility management network element can report this situation to the data management network element. In this way, the data management network element can instruct the terminal to establish multiple connections.
下面结合附图对本申请实施例的通信方法及装置进行进一步介绍。可以理解的,本申请中是以网络设备和终端作为该交互示意的执行主体为例进行示意的,但本申请并不限制交互示意的执行主体。例如,本申请中由网络设备执行的方法,也可以由应用于网络设备的模块(例如芯片、芯片系统、或处理器)执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分网络设备功能的逻辑节点、逻辑模块或软件来实现;本申请中由终端执行的方法,也可以由应用于终端的模块(例如芯片、芯片系统、或处理器)执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分终端功能的逻辑节点、逻辑模块或软件来实现。The communication method and device of the embodiment of the present application are further introduced below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings. It can be understood that the present application uses the network device and the terminal as the execution subject of the interactive schematic as an example for illustration, but the present application does not limit the execution subject of the interactive schematic. For example, the method executed by the network device in the present application can also be executed by a module (such as a chip, a chip system, or a processor) applied to the network device, and can also be implemented by a logical node, a logical module or software that can realize all or part of the functions of the network device; the method executed by the terminal in the present application can also be executed by a module (such as a chip, a chip system, or a processor) applied to the terminal, and can also be implemented by a logical node, a logical module or software that can realize all or part of the terminal functions.
下面将通过方法实施例具体介绍上述通信系统中各网元/设备之间的交互流程。本申请实施例提供的通信方法可以适用于上述通信系统,并具体应用到上述通信系统中提到的各种场景,下面具体介绍。The following will specifically introduce the interaction process between each network element/device in the above communication system through a method embodiment. The communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be applicable to the above communication system, and is specifically applied to various scenarios mentioned in the above communication system, which are specifically introduced below.
图8为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的流程示意图一。该通信方法适用到上述通信系统,主要涉及数据管理网元与终端之间的交互。Fig. 8 is a flow chart of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application. The communication method is applicable to the above communication system, and mainly involves the interaction between a data management network element and a terminal.
S801,在终端未建立多连接的情况下,数据管理网元获取指示信息,S801, when the terminal does not establish multiple connections, the data management network element obtains instruction information,
多连接可以指同时建立多个3GPP接入类型的连接,3GPP接入类型的连接属于相同或不同的网络,也就是说,多连接也可以指同时与一个或多个网络分别建立3GPP接入类型的连接,或者说,使用多个3GPP接入类型分别接入相同或不同的网络。多个网络可以是不同的运营商网络,如不同的PLMN,或者也可以是不同的非公共网络(non-public network,NPN),或者也可以是不同的PLMN和NPN,或者也可以是其他任何可能的网络,如WLAN与PLMN。例如,以PLMN为例,终端通过3GPP接入类型接入并注册到PLMN#1的同时,终端还通过3GPP接入类型接入并注册到PLMN#2,此时,就意味着终端同时与PLMN#1和PLMN#2分别建立3GPP接入类型的连接,也即,建立多连接。又例如,以NPN为例,终端通过3GPP接入类型接入并注册到NPN#1的同时,终端还通过3GPP接入类型接入并注册到NPN#2,此时,就意味着终端同时与NPN#1和NPN#2分别建立3GPP接入类型的连接。再例如,以NPN和PLMN为例,终端通过3GPP接入类型接入并注册到NPN的同时,终端还通过3GPP接入类型接入并注册到PLMN,此时,就意味着终端同时与NPN和PLMN分别建立3GPP接入类型的连接。Multi-connection can refer to establishing multiple 3GPP access type connections at the same time, and the 3GPP access type connections belong to the same or different networks, that is, multi-connection can also refer to establishing 3GPP access type connections with one or more networks at the same time, or using multiple 3GPP access types to access the same or different networks. Multiple networks can be different operator networks, such as different PLMNs, or different non-public networks (NPNs), or different PLMNs and NPNs, or any other possible networks, such as WLAN and PLMN. For example, taking PLMN as an example, while the terminal accesses and registers to PLMN#1 through the 3GPP access type, the terminal also accesses and registers to PLMN#2 through the 3GPP access type. At this time, it means that the terminal simultaneously establishes 3GPP access type connections with PLMN#1 and PLMN#2, that is, multiple connections are established. For another example, taking NPN as an example, when the terminal accesses and registers to NPN#1 through 3GPP access type, the terminal also accesses and registers to NPN#2 through 3GPP access type. At this time, it means that the terminal simultaneously establishes 3GPP access type connections with NPN#1 and NPN#2. For another example, taking NPN and PLMN as an example, when the terminal accesses and registers to NPN through 3GPP access type, the terminal also accesses and registers to PLMN through 3GPP access type. At this time, it means that the terminal simultaneously establishes 3GPP access type connections with NPN and PLMN.
指示信息可以用于指示终端需要建立多连接。The indication information may be used to indicate that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections.
一种可能的实现方式中,指示信息可以显示指示终端需要建立多连接。例如,指示信息可以包括1个比特(bit)的指示信元,该指示信元的取值为1即指示终端需要建立多连接,该指示信元的取值为0即表示为空,即指示终端不需要建立多连接。In a possible implementation, the indication information may indicate that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections. For example, the indication information may include a 1-bit indication information element, the value of which is 1, indicating that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, and the value of which is 0, indicating that it is empty, indicating that the terminal does not need to establish multiple connections.
另一种可能的实现方式中,指示信息也可以隐含指示终端需要建立多连接。例如,指示信息可以用于指示网络列表。In another possible implementation, the indication information may also implicitly indicate that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections. For example, the indication information may be used to indicate a network list.
其中,网络列表指示的多个网络为能用于建立多连接的网络,新的网络列表可以是专门用于建立多连接的选网列表,换言之,该网络列表可以是专门用于建立多连接的选网列表,其可以通过额外的指示或者网络列表的名称与现有的选网列表区分,终端通过在该网络列表中选择并接入网络,以实现建立多连接。可选地,网络列表指示的多个网络中不包含终端当前接入的网络,以避免终端继续选择接入终端当前已接入的网络而导致多连接建立失败。例如,终端当前接入的网络为PLMN#1,网络列表可以包含PLMN#2,PLMN#3和PLMN#4。当然,网络列表指示的多个网络中也可以包含终端当前接入的网络,如包含终端当前接入的网络的标识,此时,终端可以默认不选择当前已接入的网络。Among them, the multiple networks indicated by the network list are networks that can be used to establish multiple connections. The new network list can be a network selection list specifically used to establish multiple connections. In other words, the network list can be a network selection list specifically used to establish multiple connections. It can be distinguished from the existing network selection list by additional indications or the name of the network list. The terminal selects and accesses the network in the network list to achieve the establishment of multiple connections. Optionally, the multiple networks indicated by the network list do not include the network currently accessed by the terminal to avoid the terminal continuing to select the network currently accessed by the terminal and causing the failure of multiple connection establishment. For example, the network currently accessed by the terminal is PLMN#1, and the network list can include PLMN#2, PLMN#3 and PLMN#4. Of course, the multiple networks indicated by the network list can also include the network currently accessed by the terminal, such as including the identifier of the network currently accessed by the terminal. At this time, the terminal can default not to select the currently accessed network.
这种情况下,由于网络列表本就具备指示终端需要建立多连接的功能,因此,指示信息可以通过指示网络列来隐含指示终端需要建立多连接。例如,指示信息可以携带用于指示网络列表的信息,如网络列表的标识,与现有的选网列表不同,该标识指示的网络列表可以是专门用于多连接的网络列表,也即,该网络列表的标识可以与现有的选网列表的标识区分,可以理解为是上述的“额外的指示或者网络列表的名称”,比如,现有的选网列表的标识为ID#1,本申请实施例中的网络列表的标识为ID#2。当终端接收到指示信息时,就可以获知指示信息携带的网络列表的标识指示的是用于建立多连接的网络列表,从而获知终端需要建立多连接。In this case, since the network list already has the function of indicating that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, the indication information can implicitly indicate that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections by indicating the network list. For example, the indication information can carry information used to indicate the network list, such as an identifier of the network list. Unlike the existing network selection list, the network list indicated by the identifier can be a network list specifically used for multiple connections, that is, the identifier of the network list can be distinguished from the identifier of the existing network selection list, and can be understood as the above-mentioned "additional indication or name of the network list". For example, the identifier of the existing network selection list is ID#1, and the identifier of the network list in the embodiment of the present application is ID#2. When the terminal receives the indication information, it can be known that the identifier of the network list carried by the indication information indicates a network list used to establish multiple connections, thereby knowing that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections.
可选地,网络列表还可以指示多个网络支持终端签约的无线接入技术类型,这些无线接入技术类型可以不同,如PLMN#2支持终端签约的无线接入技术类型为TN,PLMN#3支持终端签约的无线接入技术类型为TN和NTN,PLMN#4支持终端签约的无线接入技术类型为NTN,又如PLMN#2支持终端签约的无线接入技术类型为5G,PLMN#3支持终端签约的无线接入技术类型为5G和6G,PLMN#4支持终端签约的无线接入技术类型为6G等,避免因无线接入技术类型不支持而导致多连接建立失败。Optionally, the network list may also indicate the types of wireless access technologies supported by the terminal for contracting by multiple networks. These types of wireless access technologies may be different. For example, the type of wireless access technology supported by PLMN#2 for terminal contracting is TN, the type of wireless access technology supported by PLMN#3 for terminal contracting is TN and NTN, and the type of wireless access technology supported by PLMN#4 for terminal contracting is NTN. For another example, the type of wireless access technology supported by PLMN#2 for terminal contracting is 5G, the type of wireless access technology supported by PLMN#3 for terminal contracting is 5G and 6G, and the type of wireless access technology supported by PLMN#4 for terminal contracting is 6G, etc., to avoid failure in establishing multiple connections due to unsupported wireless access technology types.
可选地,指示信息还可以携带网络列表,或者也可以不携带网络列表,如网络列表可以预配置在终端本地。Optionally, the indication information may also carry a network list, or may not carry a network list, for example, the network list may be pre-configured locally in the terminal.
可以理解,上述两种实现方式也可以结合实施,指示信息既可以携带上述的指示信元,又可以携带上述的网络列表的标识和网络列表,对此不做具体限制。It can be understood that the above two implementations can also be implemented in combination, and the indication information can carry both the above indication information element and the above network list identifier and network list, and there is no specific limitation on this.
可选地,指示信息还可以用于指示建立多连接的策略,如包括至少一项:业务策略、接入类型策略、位置策略、或者时间策略。Optionally, the indication information may also be used to indicate a strategy for establishing multiple connections, such as including at least one of: a service strategy, an access type strategy, a location strategy, or a time strategy.
业务策略可以指多连接需要在终端当前接入的网络(在没有特别说明的情况下,下文均可以理解为是一个网络)无法满足业务需求的情况下建立,也即,以实现按业务的需求建立,避免冗余。例如,业务策略可以是业务的门限值,超过该门限值则认为网络无法满足业务需求,需要触发建立多连接。比如,业务的门限值可以是时延门限值,此时,如果业务的传输时延(如空口传输时延或者用户面锚点到终端的传输时延等)超过时延门限值时,则认为当前网络无法满足业务需求,如出现网络拥塞等情况。又比如,业务的门限值也可以是带宽、丢包率等参数的门限值,此时,如果网络能够为业务提供的带宽小于带宽门限值,和/或,该业务的丢包率大于丢包率门限值,则认为当前网络无法满足业务需求。当然,上述关于业务的门限值的实现为一些示例,不作为对本申请实施例的限制,任何可能用于评估网络是否能够满足业务的需求的参数都可以认为是本申请实施例的门限值,如业务的数据包排队等待时长、业务的数据包重传次数等。The service policy may refer to the need to establish multiple connections when the network currently accessed by the terminal (unless otherwise specified, it can be understood as a network below) cannot meet the service requirements, that is, to achieve establishment according to the service requirements and avoid redundancy. For example, the service policy may be a threshold value for the service. If the threshold value is exceeded, it is considered that the network cannot meet the service requirements and it is necessary to trigger the establishment of multiple connections. For example, the threshold value for the service may be a delay threshold value. At this time, if the transmission delay of the service (such as the air interface transmission delay or the transmission delay from the user plane anchor point to the terminal, etc.) exceeds the delay threshold value, it is considered that the current network cannot meet the service requirements, such as network congestion. For another example, the threshold value for the service may also be the threshold value of parameters such as bandwidth and packet loss rate. At this time, if the bandwidth that the network can provide for the service is less than the bandwidth threshold value, and/or the packet loss rate of the service is greater than the packet loss rate threshold value, it is considered that the current network cannot meet the service requirements. Of course, the above-mentioned implementation of the threshold value for the service is some examples and does not serve as a limitation to the embodiments of the present application. Any parameter that may be used to evaluate whether the network can meet the needs of the service can be considered as the threshold value of the embodiments of the present application, such as the queuing waiting time of the service data packet, the number of data packet retransmissions of the service, etc.
接入类型策略是指建立多连接所需的无线接入技术类型组合。例如,在多连接是双连接的情况下,无线接入技术类型组合可以是TN+TN,或者TN+NTN,或者在未来6G网络应用后,双连接也可以是不同制式的网络组合,如5G+6G或6G+卫星等等组合。当然,在多连接是3个或3个以上的3GPP接入类型的连接的情况下,无线接入技术类型组合可以更多无线接入技术类型的组合,如TN+TN+TN,或TN+TN+NTN,或NTN+NTN+NTN,或4G+5G+6G,或5G+6G+卫星等,可以根据实际需求任意组合,以此类推,不再赘述。如此,可以实现接入资源的解耦,即,不同的无线接入技术类型的连接使用不同的网络资源,避免均采用同一无线接入技术类型而导致网络资源紧张。The access type strategy refers to the combination of wireless access technology types required to establish multiple connections. For example, in the case where the multiple connections are dual connections, the wireless access technology type combination can be TN+TN, or TN+NTN, or after the 6G network is applied in the future, the dual connection can also be a combination of networks of different standards, such as 5G+6G or 6G+satellite, etc. Of course, in the case where the multiple connections are 3 or more 3GPP access type connections, the wireless access technology type combination can be a combination of more wireless access technology types, such as TN+TN+TN, or TN+TN+NTN, or NTN+NTN+NTN, or 4G+5G+6G, or 5G+6G+satellite, etc., which can be arbitrarily combined according to actual needs, and so on, and will not be repeated. In this way, the decoupling of access resources can be achieved, that is, connections of different wireless access technology types use different network resources to avoid the use of the same wireless access technology type and cause network resource shortages.
位置策略是指多连接需要在预设区域内建立,如需要通信信号增强的低信号区域,以保障用户在该区域内的通信质量。例如,位置策略可以包括用于指示预设区域所在位置的信息,如可以网络能够识别的信息,如小区的标识,或者也可以是其他任何可能的位置信息,如经纬度信息。Location strategy means that multiple connections need to be established in a preset area, such as a low signal area that requires communication signal enhancement, to ensure the communication quality of users in the area. For example, the location strategy may include information indicating the location of the preset area, such as information that can be recognized by the network, such as a cell identifier, or any other possible location information, such as longitude and latitude information.
时间策略是指多连接需要在预设时间段内建立,如业务需求量大的时间段,以保障该时间段内的业务体验。例如,时间策略可以包括用于指示预设时间段的信息,比如,预设时间段是周期性的时间段,用于指示预设时间段的信息可以包括相邻周期的间隔时长的信息,每个周期内需要建立多连接的时间段的信息,如距每个周期开始时刻之后的t1至t2的时间段,或者在每个周期结束时刻之前的t1至t2的时间段。The time policy means that multiple connections need to be established within a preset time period, such as a time period with high business demand, to ensure the business experience within the time period. For example, the time policy may include information for indicating the preset time period, such as the preset time period is a periodic time period, and the information for indicating the preset time period may include information about the interval length of adjacent periods, information about the time period in each period in which multiple connections need to be established, such as the time period from t1 to t2 after the start time of each period, or the time period from t1 to t2 before the end time of each period.
可以理解,如果指示信息指示了上述建立多连接的策略,则表示后续终端需要按照指示在必要时建立多连接,如果指示信息未指示上述建立多连接的策略,则表示网络对终端建立多连接没有策略限制,终端可以自行决策建立多连接。It can be understood that if the indication information indicates the above-mentioned strategy for establishing multiple connections, it means that subsequent terminals need to establish multiple connections when necessary according to the instructions. If the indication information does not indicate the above-mentioned strategy for establishing multiple connections, it means that the network has no policy restrictions on the terminal establishing multiple connections, and the terminal can decide to establish multiple connections on its own.
还可以理解,终端在未建立多连接的情况下触发建立多连接为一种示例,不作为限定,终端建立多连接可以不考虑当前是否已建立多连接,比如,终端在已建立多连接的情况下仍可以继续建立多连接,如已建立的多连接是2个3GPP接入类型的连接,终端可以继续建立多连接,如增加到3个3GPP接入类型的连接。或者,终端在已建立多连接的情况下,根据本发明的方案触发UE更改连接的网络。It can also be understood that the triggering of establishing multiple connections by the terminal when multiple connections have not been established is an example and is not intended to be limiting. The terminal may establish multiple connections regardless of whether multiple connections have been established currently. For example, the terminal may continue to establish multiple connections when multiple connections have been established. For example, if the established multiple connections are two 3GPP access type connections, the terminal may continue to establish multiple connections, such as increasing the number to three 3GPP access type connections. Alternatively, when multiple connections have been established, the terminal triggers the UE to change the connected network according to the solution of the present invention.
S802,数据管理网元向终端发送指示信息。终端接收指示信息。S802, the data management network element sends instruction information to the terminal, and the terminal receives the instruction information.
可以理解,数据管理网元向终端发送可以包括数据管理网元通过不同的核心网设备和/或接入网设备向终端发送。其中,发送的消息类型、参数格式可以相同也可以不同。可以理解,只要发送的内容起到相同的作用,均可以理解为是数据管理网元向终端发送。It is understood that the data management network element sending to the terminal may include the data management network element sending to the terminal through different core network devices and/or access network devices. Among them, the message type and parameter format sent may be the same or different. It is understood that as long as the sent content plays the same role, it can be understood that the data management network element sends to the terminal.
S803,终端根据指示信息,建立多连接。S803: The terminal establishes multiple connections according to the instruction information.
综上,由于网络侧,即数据管理网元可以将多连接的指示信息,使得终端可以根据指示信息,触发同时与多个网络分别建立3GPP接入类型的连接,也即,同时接入并注册到多个网络,以满足终端的更多更灵活的通信需求。In summary, since the network side, that is, the data management network element, can provide the indication information of multiple connections, the terminal can trigger the establishment of 3GPP access type connections with multiple networks at the same time according to the indication information, that is, access and register to multiple networks at the same time to meet the terminal's more flexible communication needs.
下面就每个步骤分别进行介绍。Each step is introduced below.
S801:S801:
数据管理网元获取指示信息的方式可以有多种,如可以根据终端的上报触发获取,也可以根据网络侧的其他网元的上报触发获取,或者还可以由数据管理网元自行决定触发获取,下面分别介绍。There are many ways for the data management network element to obtain indication information, such as triggering acquisition based on a report from a terminal, triggering acquisition based on a report from other network elements on the network side, or the data management network element itself deciding to trigger acquisition, which are introduced below.
方式1:终端可向网络发送终端的能力信息。相应的,数据管理网元可获取终端的能力信息,并根据终端的能力信息,获取指示信息。Mode 1: The terminal may send the capability information of the terminal to the network. Accordingly, the data management network element may obtain the capability information of the terminal and obtain the indication information according to the capability information of the terminal.
终端的能力信息(或者说终端的多连接能力)能够用于指示终端是否支持同时与多个网络分别建立3GPP接入类型的连接,也即,终端是否支持多连接,以避免因终端不支持多连接而指示终端建立多连接,导致通信资源浪费。例如,终端的能力信息可以是1个比特的信元,该信元的0/1两种取值用以分别指示终端是否支持同时与多个网络分别建立3GPP接入类型的连接。The capability information of the terminal (or the multi-connection capability of the terminal) can be used to indicate whether the terminal supports establishing 3GPP access type connections with multiple networks at the same time, that is, whether the terminal supports multiple connections, so as to avoid wasting communication resources by instructing the terminal to establish multiple connections because the terminal does not support multiple connections. For example, the capability information of the terminal can be a 1-bit information element, and the two values of 0/1 of the information element are used to indicate whether the terminal supports establishing 3GPP access type connections with multiple networks at the same time.
终端的能力信息可以通过注册流程上报给网络。例如,在终端注册的过程中,终端可以向接入和移动性管理网元发送注册请求消息。注册请求消息中可以携带注册类型(registration type)以及终端的标识信息(如SUCI或5G-GUTI或PEI)。注册类型可以是已有的如下几种:初始注册、移动性注册更新、周期性注册更新、或者紧急注册。或者,注册类型也可以是新定义的注册类型,如多连接注册、双连接注册等,或者也可以是任何可能命名的注册类型,该注册类型指示终端在注册之后需要建立多连接,也即,可以触发网络获取并下发指示信息。The terminal's capability information can be reported to the network through the registration process. For example, during the terminal registration process, the terminal can send a registration request message to the access and mobility management network element. The registration request message can carry the registration type (registration type) and the terminal's identification information (such as SUCI or 5G-GUTI or PEI). The registration type can be the following existing ones: initial registration, mobility registration update, periodic registration update, or emergency registration. Alternatively, the registration type can also be a newly defined registration type, such as multi-connection registration, dual-connection registration, etc., or it can also be any possibly named registration type, which indicates that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections after registration, that is, it can trigger the network to obtain and send indication information.
终端的能力信息可以作为一个独立信元携带在注册请求消息中,或者,也可以作为终端的无线能力上报中的信元携带在注册请求消息中。接入和移动性管理网元在接收到终端的能力信息后,可以在向数据管理网元注册终端的上下文时,将终端的能力信息上报给数据管理网元。换言之,在终端注册的过程中,数据管理网元可以接收来自接入和移动性管理网元的上下文注册请求消息,该上下文注册请求消息包括终端的能力信息,也即,复用已有的注册流程实现对终端的多连接能力的感知,或者,也可以通过新定义的流程实现,与现有的流程解耦,信元传递可以更灵活。The capability information of the terminal can be carried in the registration request message as an independent information element, or can also be carried in the registration request message as an information element in the wireless capability report of the terminal. After receiving the capability information of the terminal, the access and mobility management network element can report the capability information of the terminal to the data management network element when registering the context of the terminal to the data management network element. In other words, during the terminal registration process, the data management network element can receive a context registration request message from the access and mobility management network element, and the context registration request message includes the capability information of the terminal, that is, the existing registration process is reused to realize the perception of the multi-connection capability of the terminal, or it can also be realized through a newly defined process, which is decoupled from the existing process, and the information element transmission can be more flexible.
数据管理网元在根据终端的能力信息,确定终端支持多连接,且终端是否未建立多连接,获取指示信息。例如,由于终端在网络中注册需要在数据管理网元中保存终端的上下文,数据管理网元可以根据终端的上下文进行判断。比如,若数据管理网元当前保存有终端的一个上下文,则表示终端当前是接入并注册一个网络,可以认为终端当前没有建立多连接。若数据管理网元当前保存有同一个终端的两个上下文或两个以上的上下文,则表示终端当前已同时接入并注册到多个网络,可以认为终端当前已建立多连接,不需要执行本申请实施例的后续流程。The data management network element determines, based on the capability information of the terminal, whether the terminal supports multiple connections and whether the terminal has not established multiple connections, and obtains indication information. For example, since the terminal needs to save the context of the terminal in the data management network element when registering in the network, the data management network element can make a judgment based on the context of the terminal. For example, if the data management network element currently saves a context of the terminal, it means that the terminal is currently connected to and registered in a network, and it can be considered that the terminal currently has not established multiple connections. If the data management network element currently saves two or more contexts of the same terminal, it means that the terminal is currently connected to and registered in multiple networks at the same time, and it can be considered that the terminal has currently established multiple connections, and there is no need to execute the subsequent processes of the embodiments of the present application.
数据管理网元可以从数据管理网元本地获取指示信息,也即,指示信息中携带的信息,如指示信元、网络列表等可以事先预配置在数据管理网元本地,数据管理网元可以从本地获取网络列表等信息,并对这些信息进行封装,得到指示信息,以避免因从其他网元获取网络列表所带来的通信开销。The data management network element can obtain indication information locally from the data management network element, that is, the information carried in the indication information, such as indication cells, network lists, etc., can be pre-configured locally in the data management network element. The data management network element can obtain information such as network lists locally and encapsulate this information to obtain indication information, so as to avoid the communication overhead caused by obtaining network lists from other network elements.
或者,数据管理网元可以从其他网元获取指示信息。例如,数据管理网元从应用功能获取指示信息。具体的,若需要动态下发网络列表,则数据管理网元向应用功能网元,如SOR-AF发送请求消息,如SOR获取请求(Nsoraf_SoR_Get request)消息。该请求消息可以用于请求应用功能网元提供能用于建立多连接的网络。相应的,应用功能网元可以接收请求消息,并根据请求消息,发送响应消息,如SOR获取相应(Nsoraf_SoR_Get response)消息。其中,响应消息可以包括网络列表,具体可以是包含网络列表的指示信息。例如,应用功能网元可以根据请求消息,在本地查找能够支持建立多连接的网络的信息,并根据这些网络的信息,如网络的标识(PLMN ID),网络支持终端签约的无线接入技术类型等,确定网络列表,并进一步确定指示信息,然后将指示信息携带到响应消息中,向数据管理网元发送该响应消息。相应的,数据管理网元可以接收应用功能网元根据上述的请求消息返回的响应消息,从而获取到指示信息。Alternatively, the data management network element may obtain the indication information from other network elements. For example, the data management network element obtains the indication information from the application function. Specifically, if it is necessary to dynamically send the network list, the data management network element sends a request message to the application function network element, such as the SOR-AF, such as the SOR Get Request (Nsoraf_SoR_Get request) message. The request message may be used to request the application function network element to provide a network that can be used to establish multiple connections. Accordingly, the application function network element may receive the request message and send a response message, such as the SOR Get Response (Nsoraf_SoR_Get response) message, according to the request message. The response message may include a network list, and specifically may be indication information including the network list. For example, the application function network element may search for information about networks that can support the establishment of multiple connections locally according to the request message, and determine the network list according to the information of these networks, such as the network identifier (PLMN ID), the type of wireless access technology that the network supports the terminal to sign, and further determine the indication information, and then carry the indication information in the response message and send the response message to the data management network element. Correspondingly, the data management network element can receive the response message returned by the application function network element according to the above request message, thereby obtaining the indication information.
可选地,在数据管理网元向应用功能网元请求网络列表的情况下,数据管理网元还可以向应用功能网元发送终端的会话对应的切片信息和/或数据网络名称。其中,本申请实施例提到的切片信息可以是S-NSSAI,或者也可以被替换为任何可能的命名或信息类型,具体不做限定。本申请实施例提到的数据网络名称可以是DNN,或者也可以被替换为任何可能的命名或信息类型,具体也不做限定。该切片信息和/或数据网络名称可以事先保存在数据管理网元本地的终端的签约数据中,此时,由数据管理网元携带在上述的请求消息中发送给应用功能网元,或者也可以通过其他消息发送给应用功能网元,不做限定。相应的,应用功能网元还可以接收终端的会话对应的切片信息和/或数据网络名称,那么,应用功能网元还可以根据支持该切片信息和/或数据网络名称的多个网络,确定网络列表,也即,应用功能网元可以从本地查找到的支持建立多连接的网络的信息中,进一步确定支持该切片信息和/或数据网络名称的多个网络的信息,并根据这多个网络的信息确定网络列表,以确保与终端建立多连接的网络能够提供与终端当前接入的网络相同的服务,以满足终端的业务需求。Optionally, when the data management network element requests a network list from the application function network element, the data management network element may also send the slice information and/or data network name corresponding to the terminal session to the application function network element. Among them, the slice information mentioned in the embodiment of the present application may be S-NSSAI, or may be replaced by any possible naming or information type, without specific limitation. The data network name mentioned in the embodiment of the present application may be DNN, or may be replaced by any possible naming or information type, without specific limitation. The slice information and/or data network name may be saved in the contract data of the terminal local to the data management network element in advance. At this time, the data management network element carries it in the above-mentioned request message and sends it to the application function network element, or may also be sent to the application function network element through other messages, without limitation. Correspondingly, the application function network element can also receive the slice information and/or data network name corresponding to the terminal session. Then, the application function network element can also determine the network list based on the multiple networks that support the slice information and/or data network name. That is, the application function network element can further determine the information of the multiple networks that support the slice information and/or data network name from the information of the network that supports establishing multiple connections found locally, and determine the network list based on the information of the multiple networks to ensure that the network that establishes multiple connections with the terminal can provide the same service as the network currently connected to the terminal to meet the business needs of the terminal.
可以理解,对于终端在本地事先预配置网络列表,也即,指示信息不包含网络列表的情况,终端可以被配置为在接收到指示信息的情况下,才使用本地的该网络列表选择多个网络(或者说选择额外的网络),以建立多连接,否则,应当按照现有技术的逻辑处理。It can be understood that for the terminal that has pre-configured the network list locally, that is, the indication information does not include the network list, the terminal can be configured to use the local network list to select multiple networks (or select additional networks) to establish multiple connections only when the indication information is received. Otherwise, it should be processed according to the logic of the prior art.
方式2:终端可向网络发送终端的切片的信息。相应的,数据管理网元可获取终端请求的切片信息,并根据网络切片是多连接的业务对应的切片,获取多连接的相关信息。Method 2: The terminal can send the information of the terminal's slice to the network. Correspondingly, the data management network element can obtain the slice information requested by the terminal, and obtain the relevant information of the multi-connection according to the slice corresponding to the multi-connection service of the network slice.
终端请求的切片信息能够用于指示终端请求的网络切片,如相同或不同的网络切片,例如,终端可以在注册请求消息中指示请求使用S-NSSAI#1和/或S-NSSAI#2。The slice information requested by the terminal can be used to indicate the network slice requested by the terminal, such as the same or different network slice. For example, the terminal can indicate a request to use S-NSSAI#1 and/or S-NSSAI#2 in the registration request message.
终端请求的切片信息也能够通过注册流程上报给网络。例如,在终端注册的过程中,终端可以向接入和移动性管理网元发送携带终端请求的切片信息的注册请求消息,该注册请求消息中携带的注册类型也可以参考上述方式1的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。接入和移动性管理网元在接收到终端请求的切片信息后,可以在向数据管理网元注册终端的上下文时,将终端的能力信息上报给数据管理网元。换言之,在终端注册的过程中,数据管理网元可以接收来自接入和移动性管理网元的上下文注册请求消息,该上下文注册请求消息包括终端请求的切片信息,也即,复用已有的注册流程实现对终端的多连接需求的感知,或者,也可以通过新定义的流程实现,与现有的流程解耦,信元传递可以更灵活。The slice information requested by the terminal can also be reported to the network through the registration process. For example, during the terminal registration process, the terminal can send a registration request message carrying the slice information requested by the terminal to the access and mobility management network element. The registration type carried in the registration request message can also refer to the relevant introduction of the above-mentioned method 1, which will not be repeated here. After receiving the slice information requested by the terminal, the access and mobility management network element can report the terminal's capability information to the data management network element when registering the context of the terminal to the data management network element. In other words, during the terminal registration process, the data management network element can receive a context registration request message from the access and mobility management network element, and the context registration request message includes the slice information requested by the terminal, that is, the existing registration process is reused to realize the perception of the terminal's multi-connection needs, or it can also be realized through a newly defined process, which is decoupled from the existing process, and the information element transmission can be more flexible.
数据管理网元可以根据网络切片与业务的对应关系,确定终端请求的网络切片中是否有需要建立多连接的业务(或者说,多连接的业务)对应的网络切片。例如,需要建立多连接的业务为扩展现实媒体业务(extended reality media services,XRM),XRM业务对应带宽的需求比较高,因此需要建立多连接来保证大带宽,以满足XRM业务对应带宽的需求,这种情况下,XRM业务也就可以理解为是多连接的业务。当然,XRM业务仅为一种示例,不作为限定,本申请实施例不限制多连接的业务的具体业务形态。若终端请求的网络切片中有多连接的业务对应的网络切片,且终端未建立多连接,则数据管理网元可以获取指示信息,具体获取方式可以参考上述方式1的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。The data management network element can determine whether there is a network slice corresponding to a service that needs to establish multiple connections (or a service with multiple connections) in the network slice requested by the terminal based on the correspondence between the network slice and the service. For example, the service that needs to establish multiple connections is the extended reality media service (XRM). The bandwidth requirement for the XRM service is relatively high, so it is necessary to establish multiple connections to ensure a large bandwidth to meet the bandwidth requirement for the XRM service. In this case, the XRM service can also be understood as a service with multiple connections. Of course, the XRM service is only an example and is not intended to be limiting. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific service form of the service with multiple connections. If there is a network slice corresponding to a service with multiple connections in the network slice requested by the terminal, and the terminal has not established multiple connections, the data management network element can obtain the indication information. The specific acquisition method can refer to the relevant introduction of the above method 1, which will not be repeated here.
方式3:数据管理网元可获取终端的签约数据,并根据该签约数据,获取多连接的相关信息。Method 3: The data management network element may obtain the contract data of the terminal, and obtain relevant information of the multiple connections based on the contract data.
终端的签约数据是指终端事先与网络签约服务时的相关数据,可以预先保存在数据管理网元。若终端的签约数据中包含用于指示网络能为终端提供多连接的服务的信息,也即,表示终端为签约了多连接的用户,或者说终端签约了多连接的服务,以避免因向未签约的用户发送多连接的相关信息而导致通信冗余。若终端的签约数据中未包含用于指示网络能为终端提供多连接的服务的信息,则表示终端没有签约多连接的服务。当然,该信息也可以是1个比特的信元,终端的签约数据默认包含该信息,此时,可以通过该信息的0/1两种取值分别指示终端是否签约了多连接的服务。或者,若终端的签约数据中包含需要建立多连接的业务,如XRM业务,则也可以认为是终端签约了多连接的服务。The contract data of the terminal refers to the relevant data when the terminal signs a contract with the network for services in advance, and can be pre-stored in the data management network element. If the contract data of the terminal contains information used to indicate that the network can provide multi-connection services for the terminal, that is, it means that the terminal is a user who has signed a contract for multiple connections, or the terminal has signed a contract for multiple connections. The service is to avoid communication redundancy caused by sending multi-connection related information to unsigned users. If the contract data of the terminal does not contain information used to indicate that the network can provide multi-connection services for the terminal, it means that the terminal has not signed a contract for multi-connection services. Of course, the information can also be a 1-bit element, and the contract data of the terminal contains this information by default. At this time, the two values of 0/1 of the information can be used to indicate whether the terminal has signed a contract for multi-connection services. Alternatively, if the contract data of the terminal contains services that require the establishment of multiple connections, such as XRM services, it can also be considered that the terminal has signed a contract for multi-connection services.
数据管理网元可以在终端的注册过程中,获取终端的签约数据。例如,在终端注册的过程中,接入和移动性管理网元可以向数据管理网元发送签约数据获取请求消息,用以请求终端与网络签约的数据。相应的,数据管理网元可以接收来自接入和移动性管理网元的签约数据获取请求消息,并根据签约数据获取请求消息,获取终端的签约数据。如此,数据管理网元可以确定该终端的签约数据中是否包含用于指示网络能为终端提供多连接的服务的信息,或者确定该信息的取值,也即,复用已有的注册流程实现对终端的签约数据的感知,或者,也可以通过新定义的流程实现,与现有的流程解耦,信元传递可以更灵活。若终端的签约数据中包含用于指示网络能为终端提供多连接的服务的信息,或者确定该信息的取值为指示终端签约了多连接的服务,且终端未建立多连接,则数据管理网元可以获取指示信息,具体获取方式可以参考上述方式1的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。The data management network element can obtain the contract data of the terminal during the registration process of the terminal. For example, during the terminal registration process, the access and mobility management network element can send a contract data acquisition request message to the data management network element to request the data of the terminal contracted with the network. Correspondingly, the data management network element can receive the contract data acquisition request message from the access and mobility management network element, and obtain the contract data of the terminal according to the contract data acquisition request message. In this way, the data management network element can determine whether the contract data of the terminal contains information for indicating that the network can provide multi-connection services for the terminal, or determine the value of the information, that is, reuse the existing registration process to realize the perception of the contract data of the terminal, or it can also be realized through a newly defined process, decoupled from the existing process, and the information element transmission can be more flexible. If the contract data of the terminal contains information for indicating that the network can provide multi-connection services for the terminal, or determines that the value of the information is to indicate that the terminal has signed a multi-connection service, and the terminal has not established multiple connections, the data management network element can obtain the indication information. The specific acquisition method can refer to the relevant introduction of the above-mentioned method 1, which will not be repeated here.
方式4:数据管理网元可接收来自接入和移动性管理网元的业务信息,并根据终端的业务需求未被满足,获取指示信息。Mode 4: The data management network element may receive service information from the access and mobility management network element, and obtain indication information according to that the service demand of the terminal is not met.
业务信息用于指示终端的业务需求未被满足,如终端当前接入的网络(没有特别说明可理解为是一个网络)为终端提供的带宽无法满足终端的业务对带宽的需求,和/或,终端的信号质量无法满足终端的业务对信号质量的需求,或者还可以有其他任何可能的情况,对此不做限定,此时,需要终端当前接入的网络触发建立多连接来提供额外的网络资源,以满足终端的业务需求。例如,业务信息可以是多个比特的比特位图,以通过比特位图的不同取值组合指示终端的业务需求未被满足的各种情况,比如,比特位图为2个比特,00表示终端当前接入的网络为终端提供的带宽无法满足终端的业务对带宽的需求,01表示终端的信号质量无法满足终端的业务对信号质量的需求,10表示该网络为终端提供的带宽无法满足终端的业务对带宽的需求,且终端的信号质量也无法满足终端的业务对信号质量的需求,11作为预留。又例如,业务信息可以是枚举型的多个比特,每个比特的取值对应表示终端的业务需求是否被满足的一种情况。The service information is used to indicate that the service demand of the terminal is not met, such as the bandwidth provided by the network currently connected by the terminal (which can be understood as a network without special instructions) cannot meet the service demand of the terminal for bandwidth, and/or the signal quality of the terminal cannot meet the service demand of the terminal for signal quality, or there may be any other possible situations, which are not limited to this. At this time, the network currently connected by the terminal needs to trigger the establishment of multiple connections to provide additional network resources to meet the service demand of the terminal. For example, the service information can be a bitmap of multiple bits, so as to indicate various situations in which the service demand of the terminal is not met through different value combinations of the bitmap. For example, the bitmap is 2 bits, 00 indicates that the bandwidth provided by the network currently connected by the terminal cannot meet the service demand of the terminal for bandwidth, 01 indicates that the signal quality of the terminal cannot meet the service demand of the terminal for signal quality, 10 indicates that the bandwidth provided by the network to the terminal cannot meet the service demand of the terminal for bandwidth, and the signal quality of the terminal cannot meet the service demand of the terminal for signal quality, and 11 is reserved. For another example, the service information can be multiple bits of enumeration type, and the value of each bit corresponds to a situation indicating whether the service demand of the terminal is met.
业务信息可以由接入网设备通过接入和移动性管理网元上报给数据管理网元,或者也可以由接入和移动性管理网元直接上报给数据管理网元。其中,该接入网设备或者接入和移动性管理网元是终端当前接入的网络内的网元。The service information can be reported by the access network device to the data management network element through the access and mobility management network element, or can also be reported directly by the access and mobility management network element to the data management network element. The access network device or the access and mobility management network element is a network element in the network currently accessed by the terminal.
例如,接入网设备在确定自身能够为终端提供的带宽无法满足终端的业务对带宽的需求的情况下,接入网设备可以向接入和移动性管理网元发送N2消息,N2消息包括业务信息,用以指示终端当前接入的网络为终端提供的带宽无法满足终端的业务对带宽的需求。相应的,接入和移动性管理网元可以接收来自接入网设备的N2消息,并向数据管理网元发送业务信息,此时,业务信息可以携带在接入和移动性管理网元与数据管理网元之间交互的任何可能的消息中。或者,接入网设备也可能不感知终端的总带宽需求,接入网设备可以在业务请求的带宽超过接入网设备自身能够提供的带宽时,就可向接入和移动性管理网元上报当前接入网设备自身能够提供的带宽,接入和移动性管理网元可以据此计算终端的总带宽需求与当前能满足的带宽之间的差值,即为额外为终端提供的带宽。For example, when the access network device determines that the bandwidth that it can provide to the terminal cannot meet the bandwidth demand of the terminal's service, the access network device can send an N2 message to the access and mobility management network element. The N2 message includes service information, which indicates that the bandwidth provided by the network currently accessed by the terminal cannot meet the bandwidth demand of the terminal's service. Correspondingly, the access and mobility management network element can receive the N2 message from the access network device and send the service information to the data management network element. At this time, the service information can be carried in any possible message exchanged between the access and mobility management network element and the data management network element. Alternatively, the access network device may not perceive the total bandwidth demand of the terminal. When the bandwidth requested by the service exceeds the bandwidth that the access network device can provide, the access network device can report the bandwidth that the current access network device can provide to the access and mobility management network element. The access and mobility management network element can calculate the difference between the total bandwidth demand of the terminal and the bandwidth that can be met currently, which is the additional bandwidth provided to the terminal.
又例如,接入和移动性管理网元可以对终端进行移动性管理,以确定终端是否移动至低信号区域。其中,低信号区域可以预配置在接入和移动性管理网元。低信号区域可以是小区粒度的区域,如包含一个或多个小区,可以通过小区的标识表示,或者低信号区域也可以是经纬度信息划定的区域,对此不做限定。若终端当前移动至低信号区域,则接入和移动性管理网元可以根据终端位于低信号区域,获取业务信息,如从本地获取预配置好的业务信息或者在本地生成业务信息,并向数据管理网元发送该业务信息,此时,业务信息可以携带在接入和移动性管理网元与数据管理网元之间交互的任何可能的消息中,用以指示终端的信号质量无法满足终端的业务对信号质量的需求。For another example, the access and mobility management network element can perform mobility management on the terminal to determine whether the terminal has moved to a low signal area. Among them, the low signal area can be pre-configured in the access and mobility management network element. The low signal area can be an area with cell granularity, such as containing one or more cells, which can be represented by the cell identifier, or the low signal area can also be an area defined by longitude and latitude information, which is not limited. If the terminal currently moves to a low signal area, the access and mobility management network element can obtain service information based on the terminal being located in the low signal area, such as obtaining pre-configured service information locally or generating service information locally, and send the service information to the data management network element. At this time, the service information can be carried in any possible message exchanged between the access and mobility management network element and the data management network element to indicate that the signal quality of the terminal cannot meet the signal quality requirements of the terminal's service.
可以理解,接入和移动性管理网元在获取业务信息时也可以结合接入网设备上报的业务信息,例如,接入网设备上报的业务信息指示接入网设备为终端提供的带宽无法满足终端的业务对带宽的需求,且此时接入和移动性管理网元也确定终端移动至低信号区域,接入和移动性管理网元可以生成用于指示终端当前接入的网络为终端提供的带宽无法满足终端的业务对带宽的需求,且终端的信号质量无法满足终端的业务对信号质量的需求的业务信息。It can be understood that the access and mobility management network element can also combine the service information reported by the access network device when obtaining service information. For example, the service information reported by the access network device indicates that the bandwidth provided by the access network device to the terminal cannot meet the bandwidth requirements of the terminal's service, and at this time the access and mobility management network element also determines that the terminal has moved to a low signal area. The access and mobility management network element can generate service information indicating that the bandwidth provided by the network currently accessed by the terminal cannot meet the bandwidth requirements of the terminal's service, and the signal quality of the terminal cannot meet the signal quality requirements of the terminal's service.
数据管理网元在获取到业务信息的情况下,数据管理网元可以基于业务信息且终端未建立多连接,获取指示信息,具体获取方式可以参考上述方式1的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。When the data management network element obtains the service information, the data management network element can obtain the indication information based on the service information and the terminal has not established multiple connections. The specific acquisition method can refer to the relevant introduction of the above method 1, which will not be repeated here.
此外,在方式4中,接入和移动性管理网元也可以被替换为会话管理网元,如终端当前接入的网络内的会话管理网元。例如,会话管理网元可以向接入和移动向管理网元订阅终端当前接入的网络为终端提供的带宽,接入和移动向管理网元可以根据会话管理网元的订阅,从接入网设备获取终端当前接入的网络为终端提供的带宽,并通过订阅响应返回给会话管理网元。若会话管理网元确定终端当前接入的网络为终端提供的带宽无法满足终端的业务对带宽的需求,如会话管理网元管理的终端的会话对带宽的需求,则会话管理网元可以获取业务信息,如从本地获取预配置好的业务信息或者在本地生成业务信息,并向数据管理网元发送该业务信息,此时,业务信息可以携带在会话管理网元与数据管理网元之间交互的任何可能的消息中,用以指示终端当前接入的网络为终端提供的带宽无法满足终端的业务对带宽的需求。In addition, in mode 4, the access and mobility management network element may also be replaced by a session management network element, such as a session management network element in the network currently accessed by the terminal. For example, the session management network element may subscribe to the access and mobility management network element for the bandwidth provided by the network currently accessed by the terminal. The access and mobility management network element may obtain the bandwidth provided by the network currently accessed by the terminal from the access network device according to the subscription of the session management network element, and return it to the session management network element through a subscription response. If the session management network element determines that the bandwidth provided by the network currently accessed by the terminal cannot meet the bandwidth requirements of the terminal's service, such as the bandwidth requirements of the terminal's session managed by the session management network element, the session management network element may obtain service information, such as obtaining pre-configured service information locally or generating service information locally, and send the service information to the data management network element. At this time, the service information may be carried in any possible message exchanged between the session management network element and the data management network element to indicate that the bandwidth provided by the network currently accessed by the terminal cannot meet the bandwidth requirements of the terminal's service.
还可以理解,上述是以带宽和/或位置为例,对网络是否能够满足业务的需求进行介绍,不作为限定,网络是否能够满足业务的需求还可以有其他实现,如业务在网络侧的传输延时是否满足业务传输延时的要求,业务的数据包排队等待时长是否满足业务的数据包排队等待时长的要求等,换言之,任何可以用于表征业务的需求是否能够被网络满足的参数都可以适用于本申请实施例。It can also be understood that the above is an introduction to whether the network can meet the business needs by taking bandwidth and/or location as an example, and it is not a limitation. Whether the network can meet the business needs may also have other implementations, such as whether the transmission delay of the business on the network side meets the requirements of the business transmission delay, whether the queuing waiting time of the data packets of the business meets the requirements of the queuing waiting time of the data packets of the business, etc. In other words, any parameter that can be used to characterize whether the business needs can be met by the network can be applied to the embodiments of the present application.
方式5:数据管理网元可以根据预设条件,获取指示信息。Mode 5: The data management network element can obtain indication information according to preset conditions.
预设条件可以预配置在数据管理网元本地,具体可以包括如下至少一项:当前在终端需要建立多连接的时间段内、或终端的位置位于终端需要建立多连接的区域内,也即,数据管理网元可以根据当前的时间和终端当前的位置,自行决定触发终端建立多连接,避免与其他网元交互所带来的额外的开销。The preset conditions can be pre-configured locally in the data management network element, and may specifically include at least one of the following: the terminal is currently within the time period where multiple connections need to be established, or the terminal is located within the area where the terminal needs to establish multiple connections. That is, the data management network element can decide on its own to trigger the terminal to establish multiple connections based on the current time and the current location of the terminal, thereby avoiding the additional overhead caused by interacting with other network elements.
终端需要建立多连接的时间段与上述时间策略指示的预设时间段类似,可参考理解。因此,在当前时间为预设时间段的开始时间,且终端当前也未建立多连接时,数据管理网元可以获取指示信息,具体获取方式可以参考上述方式1的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。比如,预设时间段为距每个周期开始时刻之后的t1至t2的时间段,如每天的18:00-22:00,也即,用户使用频繁的时间段,在当前时间为18:00时,数据管理网元可以获取指示信息,并执行本申请实施例后续流程,触发终端建立多连接,以保障用户在该时间段内的业务体验。之后,在当前时间为22:00时,数据管理网元可以指示终端释放多连接,以降低通信开销,便于终端节能。The time period during which the terminal needs to establish multiple connections is similar to the preset time period indicated by the above-mentioned time policy, and can be used as a reference for understanding. Therefore, when the current time is the start time of the preset time period and the terminal has not currently established multiple connections, the data management network element can obtain the indication information. The specific acquisition method can refer to the relevant introduction of the above-mentioned method 1, which will not be repeated here. For example, the preset time period is the time period from t1 to t2 after the start time of each cycle, such as 18:00-22:00 every day, that is, the time period frequently used by users. When the current time is 18:00, the data management network element can obtain the indication information and execute the subsequent process of the embodiment of the present application to trigger the terminal to establish multiple connections to ensure the user's service experience within the time period. Afterwards, when the current time is 22:00, the data management network element can instruct the terminal to release multiple connections to reduce communication overhead and facilitate terminal energy saving.
终端需要建立多连接的区域与上述位置策略指示的预设区域类似,如是上述的低信号区域,可参考理解。数据管理网元通过订阅服务从终端相关的接入和移动性管理网元(或者说服务于终端的接入和移动性管理网元)获取终端的位置,或者,也可以通过其他方式获取终端的位置,如接入网设备通过接入和移动性管理网元上报给数据管理网元,具体可以根据实际需求选择,对此不做具体限制。如此,在终端当前移动至预设区域内,且终端当前也未建立多连接时,数据管理网元可以获取指示信息,具体获取方式可以参考上述方式1的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。The area where the terminal needs to establish multiple connections is similar to the preset area indicated by the above-mentioned location strategy. If it is the above-mentioned low-signal area, you can refer to it for understanding. The data management network element obtains the location of the terminal from the access and mobility management network element related to the terminal (or the access and mobility management network element serving the terminal) through a subscription service, or the location of the terminal can be obtained by other means, such as the access network device reporting to the data management network element through the access and mobility management network element. The specific selection can be based on actual needs, and there is no specific restriction on this. In this way, when the terminal currently moves to the preset area and the terminal has not currently established multiple connections, the data management network element can obtain the indication information. The specific acquisition method can refer to the relevant introduction of the above-mentioned method 1, which will not be repeated here.
方式6:终端向网络发送终端的会话对应的切片信息和/或数据网络名称。相应的,数据管理网元可获取终端的会话对应的切片信息和/或数据网络名称,并根据终端的业务是需要建立多连接的业务,获取多连接的相关信息。Mode 6: The terminal sends the slice information and/or data network name corresponding to the terminal's session to the network. Correspondingly, the data management network element can obtain the slice information and/or data network name corresponding to the terminal's session, and obtain relevant information about multiple connections based on whether the terminal's service requires the establishment of multiple connections.
其中,切片信息和/或数据网络名称可以与终端的业务对应。Among them, the slice information and/or data network name can correspond to the terminal's service.
终端的会话对应的切片信息和/或数据网络名称能够通过会话建立流程上报给网络。例如,在终端建立会话的过程中,终端可以向接入和移动性管理网元发送携带切片信息和/或数据网络名称的PDU会话建立请求消息。接入和移动性管理网元可以选择会话管理网元,并将切片信息和/或数据网络名称通过PDU会话创建会话上下文请求消息发送给会话管理网元。会话管理网元在接收到切片信息和/或数据网络名称后,可以在向数据管理网元注册终端的会话上下文时,将切片信息和/或数据网络名称上报给数据管理网元。换言之,在终端注册的过程中,在终端的会话建立过程中,数据管理网元接收来自会话管理网元的上下文注册请求消息,该上下文注册请求消息可以包括切片信息和/或数据网络名称。The slice information and/or data network name corresponding to the terminal's session can be reported to the network through the session establishment process. For example, in the process of establishing a session with the terminal, the terminal can send a PDU session establishment request message carrying the slice information and/or the data network name to the access and mobility management network element. The access and mobility management network element can select a session management network element, and send the slice information and/or the data network name to the session management network element through a PDU session creation session context request message. After receiving the slice information and/or the data network name, the session management network element can report the slice information and/or the data network name to the data management network element when registering the session context of the terminal with the data management network element. In other words, during the terminal registration process, during the session establishment process of the terminal, the data management network element receives a context registration request message from the session management network element, and the context registration request message may include slice information and/or the data network name.
数据管理网元可以根据切片信息或数据网络名称与业务的对应关系,确定上下文注册请求消息中的切片信息和/或数据网络名称对应的业务。此时,一种实现方式为:数据管理网元可以确定该业务是否为需要建立多连接的业务,如XRM业务,或者其他任何可能类型的业务,若该业务为多连接的业务,如XRM业务,且终端当前也未建立多连接,则数据管理网元可以获取指示信息,具体获取方式可以参考上述方式1的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。另一种实现方式为:数据管理网元可以确定该业务的需求是否被满足,如向接入和移动性管理网元或者会话管理网元发起订阅,以确定终端当前接入的网络为终端提供的带宽是否能够满足该业务对带宽的需求,具体实现也可以参考上述方式5的相关介绍。在终端当前接入的网络为终端提供的带宽无法满足该业务对带宽的需求,且终端当前也未建立多连接的情况下,数据管理网元可以获取指示信息,具体获取方式可以参考上述方式1的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。The data management network element can determine the service corresponding to the slice information and/or data network name in the context registration request message according to the correspondence between the slice information or the data network name and the service. At this time, one implementation method is: the data management network element can determine whether the service is a service that requires multiple connections, such as an XRM service, or any other possible type of service. If the service is a multi-connection service, such as an XRM service, and the terminal has not currently established multiple connections, the data management network element can obtain the indication information. The specific acquisition method can refer to the relevant introduction of the above-mentioned method 1, which will not be repeated here. Another implementation method is: the data management network element can determine whether the demand for the service is met, such as initiating a subscription to the access and mobility management network element or the session management network element to determine whether the bandwidth provided by the network currently accessed by the terminal can meet the bandwidth demand of the service. The specific implementation can also refer to the relevant introduction of the above-mentioned method 5. When the bandwidth provided by the network currently accessed by the terminal cannot meet the bandwidth demand of the service, and the terminal has not currently established multiple connections, the data management network element can obtain the indication information. The specific acquisition method can refer to the relevant introduction of the above-mentioned method 1, which will not be repeated here.
或者,数据管理网元也可以确定当前网络无法满足终端的业务要求。例如,终端请求的切片当前网络智能提供部分、或终端请求的业务当前网络无法提供,举例:NPN无法提供IMS服务,在UE接入NPN的场景下可以额外选择一个PLMN获取IMS服务。这种情况下,数据管理网元触发建立多连接,用以满足终端的业务对网络要求。Alternatively, the data management network element may determine that the current network cannot meet the service requirements of the terminal. For example, the current network can only provide part of the slice requested by the terminal, or the service requested by the terminal cannot be provided by the current network. For example, NPN cannot provide IMS services. In the scenario where the UE accesses NPN, an additional PLMN can be selected to obtain IMS services. In this case, the data management network element triggers the establishment of multiple connections to meet the network requirements of the terminal's services.
方式7:在终端需要建立多连接的情况下,终端可向网络发送请求信息。相应的,数据管理网元可接收来自终端的请求信息,并根据请求信息,获取多连接的相关信息。Mode 7: When the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, the terminal can send request information to the network. Correspondingly, the data management network element can receive the request information from the terminal and obtain relevant information of the multiple connections according to the request information.
请求信息用于指示终端请求建立多连接,也即,多连接的建立可以由终端自行决定触发,使得终端与网络侧的交互更简单,通信开销可以更小。例如,终端可以给用户提供开启或关闭多连接的功能。比如,终端提供多连接的用户交互界面,该用户交互界面设置有开启或关闭多连接按钮,用户可以通过点击该按钮选择开启或关闭多连接的功能。又比如,终端可以提供选择网络模式的界面,在该界面上,若用户选择网络模型为多网络,则表示开启多连接的功能,若用户再选择网络模型为单网络,则表示关闭多连接的功能,此时,需要释放多连接,建立单连接。或者,用户开启或关闭多连接的功能还可以有其他实现,本申请不做限制。The request information is used to indicate that the terminal requests to establish multiple connections, that is, the establishment of multiple connections can be triggered by the terminal itself, so that the interaction between the terminal and the network side is simpler and the communication overhead can be smaller. For example, the terminal can provide the user with the function of turning on or off multiple connections. For example, the terminal provides a user interaction interface for multiple connections, and the user interaction interface is provided with a button to turn on or off multiple connections. The user can choose to turn on or off the function of multiple connections by clicking the button. For another example, the terminal can provide an interface for selecting a network mode. On this interface, if the user selects the network model as multiple networks, it means turning on the function of multiple connections. If the user selects the network model as a single network, it means turning off the function of multiple connections. At this time, it is necessary to release multiple connections and establish a single connection. Alternatively, the function of users turning on or off multiple connections can also be implemented in other ways, which is not limited by this application.
若用户操作开启多连接,则终端可以响应用户的操作,向网络发送请求信息,如向接入和移动性管理网元发送携带请求信息的UL NAS消息。接入和移动性管理网元在获取到请求信息后,可以向数据管理网元发送请求信息,如发送携带请求信息的签约数据获取请求消息。相应的,数据管理网元可接收来自终端的请求信息,如接收携带请求信息的签约数据获取请求消息,也即,通过复用已有信令实现,或者,也可以通过新定义的流程实现,与现有的流程解耦,信元传递可以更灵活。数据管理网元可以根据请求信息,获取指示信息,具体获取方式可以参考上述方式1的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。If the user operation turns on multiple connections, the terminal can respond to the user operation and send request information to the network, such as sending a UL NAS message carrying the request information to the access and mobility management network element. After obtaining the request information, the access and mobility management network element can send request information to the data management network element, such as sending a contract data acquisition request message carrying the request information. Correspondingly, the data management network element can receive request information from the terminal, such as receiving a contract data acquisition request message carrying the request information, that is, by reusing existing signaling, or it can also be implemented through a newly defined process, which is decoupled from the existing process and the information element transmission can be more flexible. The data management network element can obtain the indication information based on the request information. The specific acquisition method can refer to the relevant introduction of the above method 1, which will not be repeated here.
需要指出的是,上述方式1-方式7还可以组合实施。例如,方式1与方式2组合实施,数据管理网元可以在终端支持多连接,且终端请求的网络切片是多连接的业务对应的网络切片的情况下,获取指示信息。又例如,方式1与方式3组合实施,数据管理网元可以在终端支持多连接,且终端签约了多连接的服务的情况下,获取指示信息。再例如,方式1、方式和方式3组合实施,数据管理网元可以在终端支持多连接,终端请求的网络切片是多连接的业务对应的网络切片,且终端签约了多连接的服务的情况下,获取指示信息。当然,还有其他组合方式,如方式1与方式4组合实施,方式1与方式5组合实施等等,可参考理解,本申请实施例不再赘述。It should be pointed out that the above-mentioned methods 1 to 7 can also be implemented in combination. For example, method 1 is implemented in combination with method 2, and the data management network element can obtain indication information when the terminal supports multiple connections and the network slice requested by the terminal is the network slice corresponding to the multi-connection service. For another example, method 1 is implemented in combination with method 3, and the data management network element can obtain indication information when the terminal supports multiple connections and the terminal has signed a contract for a multi-connection service. For another example, method 1, method 3 and method 3 are implemented in combination, and the data management network element can obtain indication information when the terminal supports multiple connections, the network slice requested by the terminal is the network slice corresponding to the multi-connection service, and the terminal has signed a contract for a multi-connection service. Of course, there are other combinations, such as the combination of method 1 and method 4, the combination of method 1 and method 5, etc., which can be referred to for understanding, and the embodiments of the present application will not be repeated.
S802:S802:
数据管理网元可以通过SOR流程将指示信息发送给终端。例如,对于注册流程中的SOR流程,数据管理网元向接入和移动性管理网元发送携带指示信息的签约数据获取响应消息。相应的,接入和移动性管理网元接收来自数据管理网元的指示信息,如携带该指示信息的签约数据获取响应消息,接入和移动性管理网元可以将指示信息携带在注册接受消息中,然后发送给终端。对于注册流程之后的SOR流程,数据管理网元向接入和移动性管理网元发送携带指示信息的签约数据获取响应消息。相应的,接入和移动性管理网元在接收到来自数据管理网元的指示信息后,可以通过DL NAS传输容器将指示信息发送给终端。The data management network element may send indication information to the terminal through the SOR process. For example, for the SOR process in the registration process, the data management network element sends a contract data acquisition response message carrying the indication information to the access and mobility management network element. Accordingly, the access and mobility management network element receives the indication information from the data management network element, such as the contract data acquisition response message carrying the indication information, and the access and mobility management network element may carry the indication information in the registration acceptance message and then send it to the terminal. For the SOR process after the registration process, the data management network element sends a contract data acquisition response message carrying the indication information to the access and mobility management network element. Accordingly, after receiving the indication information from the data management network element, the access and mobility management network element may send the indication information to the terminal through the DL NAS transmission container.
可以理解,SOR流程也可以参考上述技术术语介绍中的相关内容理解,在此不再赘述。It can be understood that the SOR process can also be understood by referring to the relevant content in the above technical terminology introduction, which will not be repeated here.
S803:S803:
终端当前接入的网络记为第一网络,也即,终端已与第一网络建立3GPP接入类型的连接。在此基础上,终端可以根据指示信息,从网络列表指示的多个网络中选择第二网络,如按多个网络优先级从高低的顺序,依次选择一个或多个第二网络,并与第二网络建立3GPP接入类型的连接。The network currently accessed by the terminal is recorded as the first network, that is, the terminal has established a 3GPP access type connection with the first network. On this basis, the terminal can select a second network from multiple networks indicated by the network list according to the indication information, such as selecting one or more second networks in order of priority from high to low, and establish a 3GPP access type connection with the second network.
若网络列表还指示了多个网络各自支持终端签约的无线接入技术类型,则终端在选择出第二网络后,还可以按照网络列表指示的第二网络支持的终端签约的无线接入技术类型,接入第二网络,如NT接入,或者NTN接入等。If the network list also indicates that multiple networks each support the type of wireless access technology subscribed by the terminal, after selecting the second network, the terminal can also access the second network according to the type of wireless access technology subscribed by the terminal supported by the second network indicated in the network list, such as NT access or NTN access.
若指示信息还指示了建立多连接的策略,则终端需要在策略被满足的情况下,如终端确定终端当前接入的网络无法满足业务需求,或者终端当前移动至预设区域,或者当前时间为预设时间段的开始时刻,终端可以从网络列表指示的多个网络中选择第二网络,并与第二网络建立3GPP接入类型的连接。或者,终端也可以事先选择好第二网络,以便在策略被满足的情况下,触发与第二网络建立3GPP接入类型的连接。此外,若建立多连接的策略指示了接入类型策略,则终端在选择网络时应当考虑网络支持终端签约的无线接入技术类型,以便选择的第二网络与第一网络的无线接入技术类型组合能够满足接入类型策略的要求。If the indication information also indicates a strategy for establishing multiple connections, the terminal needs to select a second network from the multiple networks indicated in the network list and establish a 3GPP access type connection with the second network when the strategy is met, such as when the terminal determines that the network the terminal is currently connected to cannot meet the service requirements, or the terminal is currently moving to a preset area, or the current time is the beginning of a preset time period. Alternatively, the terminal may also select the second network in advance so as to trigger the establishment of a 3GPP access type connection with the second network when the strategy is met. In addition, if the strategy for establishing multiple connections indicates an access type strategy, the terminal should consider the type of wireless access technology that the network supports the terminal to sign when selecting a network, so that the combination of the wireless access technology type of the selected second network and the first network can meet the requirements of the access type strategy.
可以理解,在上述的S801-S803中,数据管理网元通常是在终端当前未建立多连接的情况下,才向终端发送指示信息,以触发终端建立多连接。当然,数据管理网元也可以不考虑终端当前是否已建立多连接,数据管理网元默认向终端发送指示信息,此时,若终端已建立多连接,则终端可以忽视该指示信息,或者,终端也可以根据该指示信息,更新多连接,如从指示信息指示的网络列表中选择新的网络接入。比如,终端已建立多连接为终端同时与PLMN#1和PLMN#2分别建立3GPP接入类型的连接,此时,终端根据最新下发的网络列表,可以再额外与PLMN#3建立3GPP接入类型的连接,或者也可以先将与PLMN#2建立3GPP接入类型的连接释放,再与PLMN#3建立3GPP接入类型的连接。It can be understood that in the above S801-S803, the data management network element usually sends indication information to the terminal to trigger the terminal to establish multiple connections only when the terminal has not currently established multiple connections. Of course, the data management network element may also not consider whether the terminal has currently established multiple connections. The data management network element sends indication information to the terminal by default. At this time, if the terminal has established multiple connections, the terminal can ignore the indication information, or the terminal can also update the multiple connections according to the indication information, such as selecting a new network access from the network list indicated by the indication information. For example, the terminal has established multiple connections for the terminal to establish 3GPP access type connections with PLMN#1 and PLMN#2 respectively. At this time, the terminal can establish an additional 3GPP access type connection with PLMN#3 according to the latest issued network list, or it can first release the 3GPP access type connection with PLMN#2, and then establish a 3GPP access type connection with PLMN#3.
可以理解,上述是以网络下发网络列表或者网络列表预先保存在终端本地为例,但不做为限制,终端还可以有其他获取网络列表的方式。例如,终端可以在本地动态构建网络列表。一种实现为:终端事先获得选网列表,该选择选网列表可以是现有的列表,如可以通过上述“3、漫游导引(steering of roaming,SOR)”定义的流程获取。网络向终端发送的上述指示信息可以多连接支持的无线接入技术类型,或者说第二网络支持的无线接入技术类型,终端可以从选网列表中选择出支持该无线接入技术类型的网络,用这些网络构建本申请实施例中的网络列表。It can be understood that the above is an example of the network sending a network list or the network list being pre-stored in the terminal locally, but it is not a limitation. The terminal can also have other ways to obtain the network list. For example, the terminal can dynamically build a network list locally. One implementation is: the terminal obtains a network selection list in advance, and the network selection list can be an existing list, such as that obtained through the process defined in the above "3. Steering of roaming (SOR)". The above-mentioned indication information sent by the network to the terminal can be the type of wireless access technology supported by multiple connections, or the type of wireless access technology supported by the second network. The terminal can select a network that supports the type of wireless access technology from the network selection list, and use these networks to construct the network list in the embodiment of the present application.
以上结合图8对本申请实施例提供的通信方法的整理流程进行了介绍。以下结合图9-图12详细说明本申请实施例提供的通信方法在具体场景下的具体流程。The above describes the arrangement process of the communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application in conjunction with Figure 8. The following describes in detail the specific process of the communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application in a specific scenario in conjunction with Figures 9 to 12.
场景1:Scenario 1:
图9为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的流程示意图二。在场景1中,UDM(上述的数据管理网元)可以通过UE(上述的终端)的注册流程中通过SOR流程,将指示信息下发给UE。Fig. 9 is a flow chart of the communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application. In scenario 1, the UDM (the above-mentioned data management network element) can send the indication information to the UE (the above-mentioned terminal) through the SOR process in the registration process of the UE.
具体的,如图9所示,该通信方法的流程如下:Specifically, as shown in FIG9 , the process of the communication method is as follows:
S901,UE向AMF(上述的接入和移动性管理网元)发送注册请求消息。S901, UE sends a registration request message to AMF (the above-mentioned access and mobility management network element).
其中,注册请求消息可以携带UE的能力信息(如上述终端的能力信息),用于指示UE是否支持多连接,具体原理也可以参考上述方式1中的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。Among them, the registration request message can carry the UE capability information (such as the capability information of the above-mentioned terminal) to indicate whether the UE supports multiple connections. The specific principle can also refer to the relevant introduction in the above-mentioned method 1, which will not be repeated here.
S902,AMF向UDM发送注册UE上下文请求消息。S902, AMF sends a register UE context request message to UDM.
在UE提供UE的能力信息的情况下,UE上下文请求消息可以携带UE的能力信息。In the case where the UE provides the UE capability information, the UE context request message may carry the UE capability information.
S903,UDM确定UE是否签约多连接的服务。S903, UDM determines whether the UE has subscribed to the multi-connection service.
在UE的能力信息指示UE支持多连接的情况下,UDM可以确定UE的签约数据中是否有多连接的服务,也即,确定UE是否签约多连接的服务,具体原理也可以参考上述方式2的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。若UE签约多连接的服务,则继续本申请实施例的后续流程,否则,若UE的能力信息指示UE不支持多连接,或者UE没有签约多连接的服务,则执行现有技术的流程。When the UE's capability information indicates that the UE supports multiple connections, the UDM can determine whether there is a multi-connection service in the UE's contract data, that is, determine whether the UE has signed a contract for a multi-connection service. The specific principle can also refer to the relevant introduction of the above-mentioned method 2, which will not be repeated here. If the UE signs a contract for a multi-connection service, continue with the subsequent process of the embodiment of the present application. Otherwise, if the UE's capability information indicates that the UE does not support multiple connections, or the UE has not signed a contract for a multi-connection service, execute the process of the prior art.
S904,UDM向AMF发送注册UE上下文响应消息。S904, UDM sends a register UE context response message to AMF.
S905,AMF向UDM发送签约数据获取请求消息。S905, AMF sends a contract data acquisition request message to UDM.
其中,S904-S905的具体实现原理可参考3GPP定义的注册流程中的相关介绍,不再赘述。Among them, the specific implementation principles of S904-S905 can refer to the relevant introduction in the registration process defined by 3GPP, which will not be repeated here.
S906,UDM确定UE当前是否已建立多连接。S906: UDM determines whether the UE currently has multiple connections established.
AMF通过签约数据获取请求消息,向UDM请求获取UE的签约数据可以触发UDM判断UE当前是否以建立多连接。例如,UDM可以确定UDM保存的是UE的一个还是多个签约数据,如果是UE的一个签约数据,则继续本申请实施例的后续流程,否则,UDM不触发后续SOR流程。AMF requests UDM to obtain the subscription data of the UE through a subscription data acquisition request message, which can trigger UDM to determine whether the UE is currently establishing multiple connections. For example, UDM can determine whether UDM stores one or more subscription data of the UE. If it is one subscription data of the UE, the subsequent process of the embodiment of the present application is continued, otherwise, UDM does not trigger the subsequent SOR process.
可以理解,S903与S906也可以在一起执行。It is understandable that S903 and S906 may also be executed together.
S907,UDM向SOR-AF(上述的应用功能网元)发送SOR获取请求消息。S907, UDM sends a SOR acquisition request message to SOR-AF (the above-mentioned application function network element).
S908,SOR-AF向UDM发送SOR获取响应消息。S908, the SOR-AF sends a SOR acquisition response message to the UDM.
SOR获取请求消息可以用于请求SOR-AF提供能用于建立多连接的网络,可选地,SOR获取请求消息还可以携带UE的会话对应的S-NSSAI和/或DNN,SOR获取请求消息可以携带上述的网络列表,具体原理也可以参考上述方式1的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。The SOR acquisition request message can be used to request the SOR-AF to provide a network that can be used to establish multiple connections. Optionally, the SOR acquisition request message may also carry the S-NSSAI and/or DNN corresponding to the UE's session. The SOR acquisition request message may carry the above-mentioned network list. The specific principle can also refer to the relevant introduction of the above-mentioned method 1, which will not be repeated here.
S909,UDM验证信息安全。S909, UDM verifies information security.
UDM可以验证网络列表的安全性,在验证通过的情况下,继续本申请实施例的后续流程,否则,流程失败。The UDM can verify the security of the network list. If the verification is successful, the subsequent process of the embodiment of the present application will continue. Otherwise, the process will fail.
应理解,S907-S909为可选流程,UDM网元可以从本地获取网络列表,或者,在UE事先预配有网络列表,也即,不需要网络动态下发网络列表的情况下,S907-S909不执行。It should be understood that S907-S909 are optional processes, and the UDM network element can obtain the network list locally, or, when the UE is pre-configured with a network list, that is, when there is no need for the network to dynamically send the network list, S907-S909 are not executed.
S910,UDM向AMF发送签约数据获取响应消息。S910, UDM sends a contract data acquisition response message to AMF.
签约数据获取响应消息可以携带UE的签约数据和指示信息,该指示信息可以用以指示UE需要建立多连接。可选地,该指示信息还可以包括网络列表。The subscription data acquisition response message may carry the subscription data of the UE and indication information, and the indication information may be used to indicate that the UE needs to establish multiple connections. Optionally, the indication information may also include a network list.
S911,UDM向UE发送注册接受消息。S911, UDM sends a registration acceptance message to the UE.
注册接受消息可以用于指示UE成功注册到网络,注册接受消息还可以包括上述的指示信息。The registration accept message may be used to indicate that the UE has successfully registered with the network, and the registration accept message may also include the above-mentioned indication information.
可以看出,S910-S911即为注册流程中的SOR流程,通过复用注册流程的消息,实现将SOR的信息,如网络列表下发给UE。It can be seen that S910-S911 is the SOR process in the registration process, and the SOR information, such as the network list, is sent to the UE by reusing the message of the registration process.
S912,UE建立多连接。S912: UE establishes multiple connections.
其中,S912的具体实现原理可参考上述S803的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。The specific implementation principle of S912 can refer to the related introduction of S803 above, which will not be repeated here.
场景2:Scenario 2:
图10为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的流程示意图三。在场景2中,UDM(上述的数据管理网元)可以通过UE(上述的终端)的注册流程中通过SOR流程,将指示信息下发给UE。Fig. 10 is a flow chart of the communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application. In scenario 2, the UDM (the above-mentioned data management network element) can send the indication information to the UE (the above-mentioned terminal) through the SOR process in the registration process of the UE.
具体的,如图10所示,该通信方法的流程如下:Specifically, as shown in FIG10 , the process of the communication method is as follows:
S1001,UE向AMF(上述的接入和移动性管理网元)发送注册请求消息。S1001, UE sends a registration request message to AMF (the above-mentioned access and mobility management network element).
其中,注册请求消息可以携带UE的能力信息(如上述终端的能力信息),用于指示UE是否支持多连接,具体原理也可以参考上述方式1中的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。Among them, the registration request message can carry the UE capability information (such as the capability information of the above-mentioned terminal) to indicate whether the UE supports multiple connections. The specific principle can also refer to the relevant introduction in the above-mentioned method 1, which will not be repeated here.
S1002,AMF向UDM发送注册UE上下文请求消息。S1002, AMF sends a register UE context request message to UDM.
在UE提供UE的能力信息的情况下,UE上下文请求消息可以携带UE的能力信息。In the case where the UE provides the UE capability information, the UE context request message may carry the UE capability information.
S1003,UE注册到网络。S1003, UE registers to the network.
S1003是在S1002之后继续执行完成的注册流程,具体实现原理可参考3GPP定义的注册流程中的相关介绍,不再赘述。S1003 is the registration process that continues to be executed after S1002. The specific implementation principle can be found in the relevant introduction of the registration process defined by 3GPP, which will not be repeated here.
S1004,UDM确定UE是否需要建立多连接。S1004: UDM determines whether the UE needs to establish multiple connections.
在UE支持多连接,且UE当前未建立多连接的情况下,UDM可以根据UE的位置和/或当期的时间,确定UE是否需要建立多连接,具体实现原理也可以参考上述方式5的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。如果UE是要建立多连接,则继续本申请实施例的后续流程,否则,UDM不触发后续SOR流程。When the UE supports multiple connections and the UE has not currently established multiple connections, the UDM can determine whether the UE needs to establish multiple connections based on the UE's location and/or the current time. The specific implementation principle can also refer to the relevant introduction of the above-mentioned method 5, which will not be repeated here. If the UE is to establish multiple connections, continue the subsequent process of the embodiment of the present application, otherwise, the UDM does not trigger the subsequent SOR process.
S1005,UDM向SOR-AF(上述的应用功能网元)发送SOR获取请求消息。S1005, UDM sends a SOR acquisition request message to SOR-AF (the above-mentioned application function network element).
S1006,SOR-AF向UDM发送SOR获取响应消息。S1006, SOR-AF sends a SOR acquisition response message to UDM.
SOR获取请求消息可以用于请求SOR-AF提供能用于建立多连接的网络,可选地,SOR获取请求消息还可以携带UE的会话对应的S-NSSAI和/或DNN,SOR获取请求消息可以携带上述的网络列表,具体原理也可以参考上述方式1的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。The SOR acquisition request message can be used to request the SOR-AF to provide a network that can be used to establish multiple connections. Optionally, the SOR acquisition request message may also carry the S-NSSAI and/or DNN corresponding to the UE's session. The SOR acquisition request message may carry the above-mentioned network list. The specific principle can also refer to the relevant introduction of the above-mentioned method 1, which will not be repeated here.
S1007,UDM验证信息安全。S1007, UDM verifies information security.
UDM可以验证网络列表的安全性,在验证通过的情况下,继续本申请实施例的后续流程,否则,流程失败。The UDM can verify the security of the network list. If the verification is successful, the subsequent process of the embodiment of the present application will continue. Otherwise, the process will fail.
应理解,S1005-S1007为可选流程,UDM网元可以从本地获取网络列表,或者,在UE事先预配有网络列表,也即,不需要网络动态下发网络列表的情况下,S1005-S1007不执行。It should be understood that S1005-S1007 are optional processes, and the UDM network element can obtain the network list locally, or, when the UE is pre-configured with a network list, that is, when there is no need for the network to dynamically send the network list, S1005-S1007 are not executed.
S1008,UDM向AMF发送签约数据通知消息。S1008, UDM sends a contract data notification message to AMF.
签约数据通知消息可以携带指示信息,该指示信息可以用以指示UE需要建立多连接。可选地,该指示信息还可以包括网络列表。The subscription data notification message may carry indication information, and the indication information may be used to indicate that the UE needs to establish multiple connections. Optionally, the indication information may also include a network list.
S1009,AMF向UE发送DL NAS消息。S1009, AMF sends DL NAS message to UE.
DL NAS消息可以携带上述的指示信息。DL NAS messages can carry the above-mentioned indication information.
可以看出,S1008-S1009即为注册流程之后的SOR流程,实现将SOR的信息,如网络列表下发给UE。It can be seen that S1008-S1009 is the SOR process after the registration process, which implements sending the SOR information, such as the network list, to the UE.
S1010,UE建立多连接。S1010, UE establishes multiple connections.
其中,S1010的具体实现原理可参考上述S803的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。The specific implementation principle of S1010 can refer to the related introduction of S803 above, which will not be repeated here.
场景3:Scenario 3:
图11为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的流程示意图四。在场景4中,UDM(上述的数据管理网元)可以根据UE(上述的终端)想要建立多连接的请求,触发将指示信息下发给UE。Fig. 11 is a fourth flow chart of the communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application. In scenario 4, the UDM (the above-mentioned data management network element) can trigger the sending of indication information to the UE according to the request of the UE (the above-mentioned terminal) to establish multiple connections.
具体的,如图11所示,该通信方法的流程如下:Specifically, as shown in FIG11 , the process of the communication method is as follows:
S1101,UE开启多连接的功能。S1101, UE enables the multi-connection function.
S1102,UE在网络中完成注册。S1102, UE completes registration in the network.
其中,S1101的具体实现原理可以参考上述S801中的方式7的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。S1102的具体实现原理可以参考3GPP中定义的注册流程的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。额外的,S1101与S1102的执行顺序不限制。The specific implementation principle of S1101 can refer to the relevant introduction of mode 7 in the above S801, which will not be repeated here. The specific implementation principle of S1102 can refer to the relevant introduction of the registration process defined in 3GPP, which will not be repeated here. In addition, the execution order of S1101 and S1102 is not limited.
S1103,UE向AMF发送UL NAS消息。S1103, UE sends UL NAS message to AMF.
UL NAS消息可以携带请求信息,用以终端请求建立多连接。UL NAS messages can carry request information for the terminal to request the establishment of multiple connections.
S1104,AMF向UDM发送签约数据获取请求消息。S1104, AMF sends a contract data acquisition request message to UDM.
发送签约数据获取请求消息可以携带上述的请求信息。The contract signing data acquisition request message sent may carry the above request information.
S1105,UDM向SOR-AF(上述的应用功能网元)发送SOR获取请求消息。S1105, UDM sends a SOR acquisition request message to SOR-AF (the above-mentioned application function network element).
S1106,SOR-AF向UDM发送SOR获取响应消息。S1106, the SOR-AF sends a SOR acquisition response message to the UDM.
SOR获取请求消息可以用于请求SOR-AF提供能用于建立多连接的网络,可选地,SOR获取请求消息还可以携带UE的会话对应的S-NSSAI和/或DNN,SOR获取请求消息可以携带上述的网络列表,具体原理也可以参考上述方式1的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。The SOR acquisition request message can be used to request the SOR-AF to provide a network that can be used to establish multiple connections. Optionally, the SOR acquisition request message may also carry the S-NSSAI and/or DNN corresponding to the UE's session. The SOR acquisition request message may carry the above-mentioned network list. The specific principle can also refer to the relevant introduction of the above-mentioned method 1, which will not be repeated here.
S1107,UDM验证信息安全。S1107, UDM verifies information security.
UDM可以验证网络列表的安全性,在验证通过的情况下,继续本申请实施例的后续流程,否则,流程失败。The UDM can verify the security of the network list. If the verification is successful, the subsequent process of the embodiment of the present application will continue. Otherwise, the process will fail.
应理解,S1105-S1107为可选流程,UDM网元可以从本地获取网络列表,或者,在UE事先预配有网络列表,也即,不需要网络动态下发网络列表的情况下,S1105-S1107不执行。It should be understood that S1105-S1107 are optional processes, and the UDM network element can obtain the network list locally, or, when the UE is pre-configured with a network list, that is, when there is no need for the network to dynamically send the network list, S1105-S1107 are not executed.
S1108,UDM向AMF发送签约数据获取响应消息。S1108, UDM sends a contract data acquisition response message to AMF.
签约数据通知消息可以携带指示信息,该指示信息可以用以指示UE需要建立多连接。可选地,该指示信息还可以包括网络列表。The subscription data notification message may carry indication information, and the indication information may be used to indicate that the UE needs to establish multiple connections. Optionally, the indication information may also include a network list.
S1109,AMF向UE发送DL NAS消息。S1109, AMF sends DL NAS message to UE.
DL NAS传输可以携带上述的指示信息。DL NAS transmissions can carry the above-mentioned indication information.
S1110,UE建立多连接。S1110, UE establishes multiple connections.
其中,S1110的具体实现原理可参考上述S803的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。The specific implementation principle of S1110 may refer to the related introduction of S803 above, which will not be repeated here.
场景4:Scenario 4:
图12为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的流程示意图五。在场景4中,UDM(上述的数据管理网元)可以通过UE(上述的终端)的会话建立流程,将指示信息下发给UE。Fig. 12 is a flow chart 5 of the communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application. In scenario 4, the UDM (the above-mentioned data management network element) can send the indication information to the UE (the above-mentioned terminal) through the session establishment process of the UE.
具体的,如图12所示,该通信方法的流程如下:Specifically, as shown in FIG12 , the process of the communication method is as follows:
S1201,会话建立流程。S1201, session establishment process.
会话建立流程可以为执行上述图4所示的S401-S416b,具体可以参考上述图4的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。The session establishment process may be to execute S401 - S416b shown in FIG. 4 . For details, please refer to the relevant introduction of FIG. 4 , which will not be described again.
S1202,SMF向UDM发送UE会话上下文注册请求(Nudm_UECM_Registration request)消息。S1202, SMF sends a UE session context registration request (Nudm_UECM_Registration request) message to UDM.
UE会话上下文注册请求可携带UE的S-NSSAI和/或DNN(上述终端的S-NSSAI和/或DNN)。The UE session context registration request may carry the UE's S-NSSAI and/or DNN (the S-NSSAI and/or DNN of the above-mentioned terminal).
S1203,UDM向SOR-AF(上述的应用功能网元)发送SOR获取请求消息。S1203, UDM sends a SOR acquisition request message to SOR-AF (the above-mentioned application function network element).
S1204,SOR-AF向UDM发送SOR获取响应消息。S1204, the SOR-AF sends a SOR acquisition response message to the UDM.
SOR获取请求消息可以用于请求SOR-AF提供能用于建立多连接的网络,可选地,SOR获取请求消息还可以携带UE的S-NSSAI和/或DNN,SOR获取请求消息可以携带上述的网络列表,具体原理也可以参考上述方式1的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。The SOR acquisition request message can be used to request the SOR-AF to provide a network that can be used to establish multiple connections. Optionally, the SOR acquisition request message may also carry the S-NSSAI and/or DNN of the UE. The SOR acquisition request message may carry the above-mentioned network list. The specific principle can also be referred to the relevant introduction of the above-mentioned method 1, which will not be repeated here.
S1205,UDM验证信息安全。S1205, UDM verifies information security.
UDM可以验证网络列表的安全性,在验证通过的情况下,继续本申请实施例的后续流程,否则,流程失败。The UDM can verify the security of the network list. If the verification is successful, the subsequent process of the embodiment of the present application will continue. Otherwise, the process will fail.
应理解,S1203-S1205为可选流程,UDM网元可以从本地获取网络列表,或者,在UE事先预配有网络列表,也即,不需要网络动态下发网络列表的情况下,S1203-S1205不执行。It should be understood that S1203-S1205 are optional processes, and the UDM network element can obtain the network list locally, or, when the UE is pre-configured with a network list, that is, when there is no need for the network to dynamically send the network list, S1203-S1205 are not executed.
S1206,UDM向AMF发送签约数据通知消息。S1206, UDM sends a contract data notification message to AMF.
签约数据通知消息可以携带指示信息,该指示信息可以用以指示UE需要建立多连接。可选地,该指示信息还可以包括网络列表。也即,UDM可以根据UE的S-NSSAI和/或DNN,触发获取指示信息,执行S1205-S1206,具体实现原理可以参考上述S801中的方式6的相关介绍,在此不再赘述The subscription data notification message may carry indication information, which may be used to indicate that the UE needs to establish multiple connections. Optionally, the indication information may also include a network list. That is, the UDM may trigger the acquisition of indication information based on the UE's S-NSSAI and/or DNN, and execute S1205-S1206. The specific implementation principle may refer to the relevant introduction of mode 6 in the above S801, which will not be repeated here.
S1207,AMF向UE发送DL NAS消息。S1207, AMF sends DL NAS message to UE.
DL NAS传输可以携带上述的指示信息。DL NAS transmissions can carry the above-mentioned indication information.
S1208,UE建立多连接。S1208: UE establishes multiple connections.
其中,S1208的具体实现原理可参考上述S803的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。The specific implementation principle of S1208 can refer to the related introduction of S803 above, which will not be repeated here.
图13为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的流程示意图六。该通信方法适用到上述通信系统,主要涉终端与网络之间的交互。Fig. 13 is a flow chart of the communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application. The communication method is applicable to the above communication system, and mainly involves the interaction between the terminal and the network.
S1301,在终端的业务需要被执行情况下,终端获取与终端的业务匹配的策略信息。S1301: When a service of a terminal needs to be executed, the terminal obtains policy information matching the service of the terminal.
策略信息可以是URSP规则,或者任何与路由相关的策略或规则,对此不做限定。URSP规则可以是增强的URSP规则,该URSP规则可以指示多连接,如定义终端需要同时与多个网络分别建立3GPP接入类型的连接,也即,类似上述指示信息的含义,具体也可以参考理解,不再赘述。可选地,URSP规则还可以指示多连接的策略,如建立多连接所需的无线接入技术类型组合,或者其他策略,具体也可以参考上述策略的相关介绍,在此不再赘述。The policy information may be a URSP rule, or any policy or rule related to routing, which is not limited. The URSP rule may be an enhanced URSP rule, which may indicate multiple connections, such as defining that the terminal needs to establish 3GPP access type connections with multiple networks at the same time, that is, similar to the meaning of the above-mentioned indication information, which may also be understood by reference, and will not be described in detail. Optionally, the URSP rule may also indicate a multi-connection strategy, such as a combination of wireless access technology types required to establish multiple connections, or other strategies, which may also be referred to the relevant introduction of the above-mentioned strategy, and will not be described in detail here.
在终端需要执行某个业务的情况下,例如,终端响应用户的操作开启某个应用,如XRM应用或者其他任何可能的应用,那么终端需要执行该应用对应的业务,如XRM业务或者其他任何可能的业务。此时,终端可以根据业务量描述词,确定URSP规则,如根据业务量描述词指示的业务特征,匹配与该业务特征相近的URSP规则,也即确定与业务匹配的URSP规则。When the terminal needs to execute a certain service, for example, the terminal responds to the user's operation to open a certain application, such as an XRM application or any other possible application, then the terminal needs to execute the service corresponding to the application, such as the XRM service or any other possible service. At this time, the terminal can determine the URSP rule according to the service volume descriptor, such as matching the URSP rule with the service feature indicated by the service volume descriptor, that is, determining the URSP rule matching the service.
S1302,若策略信息指示需要建立多连接,则建立多连接。S1302: If the policy information indicates that multiple connections need to be established, multiple connections are established.
若与业务匹配的URSP规则是上述增强的URSP规则,则终端可以根据该URSP规则的指示(如根据策略信息或者终端自行决策),与网络建立多连接,具体实现原理与上述S803类似,可以参考理解,在此不再赘述。If the URSP rule matching the service is the enhanced URSP rule, the terminal can establish multiple connections with the network according to the instructions of the URSP rule (such as according to policy information or the terminal's own decision). The specific implementation principle is similar to that of S803 above, which can be understood by reference and will not be repeated here.
当然,本申请实施例是以URSP规则为例,但不仅限于URSP规则,任何与URSP规则类似,或者说能够实现路由功能的策略和/或规则都可以用以实现本申请中的方案。Of course, the embodiment of the present application takes the URSP rule as an example, but is not limited to the URSP rule. Any strategy and/or rule similar to the URSP rule, or capable of implementing the routing function, can be used to implement the solution in the present application.
综上,终端可以通过策略信息匹配,在业务匹配到需要建立多连接的策略信息时,触发建立多连接,以保障多连接能够满足业务的需求,保障用户的使用体验。In summary, the terminal can match the policy information and trigger the establishment of multiple connections when the service matches the policy information that requires the establishment of multiple connections, so as to ensure that the multiple connections can meet the needs of the service and ensure the user experience.
一种可能的设计方案中,结合上述S1301-S1302,在S1301之前,该方法还可以包括:在终端的策略信息需要更新的情况下,策略控制网元可以获取终端的新的策略信息,向终端发送新的策略信息。相应的,终端还可以从网络接收策略信息,并配置在终端本地。此时,该新的策略信息可以是上述增强的URSP规则。其中,策略控制网元可以从应用功能获取新的策略信息,也可以由人为将新的策略信息配置给策略控制网元,对此不做限定。In a possible design scheme, in combination with the above S1301-S1302, before S1301, the method may also include: when the policy information of the terminal needs to be updated, the policy control network element may obtain the new policy information of the terminal and send the new policy information to the terminal. Correspondingly, the terminal may also receive policy information from the network and configure it locally in the terminal. At this time, the new policy information may be the above-mentioned enhanced URSP rule. Among them, the policy control network element may obtain the new policy information from the application function, or the new policy information may be manually configured to the policy control network element, which is not limited.
以上结合图8-图13详细说明了本申请实施例提供的通信方法。以下结合图14-图15详细说明用于执行本申请实施例提供的通信方法的通信装置。The communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application is described in detail above in conjunction with Figures 8 to 13. The communication device for executing the communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application is described in detail below in conjunction with Figures 14 to 15.
图14是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的结构示意图一。示例性的,如图14所示,通信装置1400包括:收发模块1401和处理模块1402。为了便于说明,图14仅示出了该通信装置的主要部件。Fig. 14 is a structural schematic diagram 1 of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application. Exemplarily, as shown in Fig. 14, a communication device 1400 includes: a transceiver module 1401 and a processing module 1402. For ease of description, Fig. 14 only shows the main components of the communication device.
第一种可能的实施例中,通信装置1400可以适用到上述通信方法中的数据管理网元,实现数据管理网元的功能,具体如下。In a first possible embodiment, the communication device 1400 may be applied to the data management network element in the above communication method to implement the functions of the data management network element, as follows.
处理模块1402,用于在终端未建立多连接的情况下,获取指示信息,收发模块1401,用于向终端发送指示信息。其中,指示信息用于指示终端需要建立多连接,多连接是指同时建立多个第三代合作伙伴计划3GPP接入类型的连接,3GPP接入类型的连接属于相同或不同的网络。The processing module 1402 is used to obtain indication information when the terminal has not established multiple connections, and the transceiver module 1401 is used to send indication information to the terminal. The indication information is used to indicate that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, and the multiple connections refer to establishing multiple third generation partnership project 3GPP access type connections at the same time, and the 3GPP access type connections belong to the same or different networks.
一种可能的设计方案中,指示信息包括网络列表,网络列表指示的多个网络为能用于建立多连接的网络。In a possible design, the indication information includes a network list, and the multiple networks indicated in the network list are networks that can be used to establish multiple connections.
可选地,收发模块1401,还用于从应用功能获取指示信息。Optionally, the transceiver module 1401 is further configured to obtain indication information from an application function.
可选地,收发模块1401,还用于在从应用功能获取指示信息之前,向应用功能网元发送终端的会话对应的切片信息和/或数据网络名称;网络列表指示的多个网络为支持切片信息和/或数据网络名称的网络。Optionally, the transceiver module 1401 is also used to send slice information and/or data network name corresponding to the terminal session to the application function network element before obtaining indication information from the application function; the multiple networks indicated by the network list are networks that support slice information and/or data network names.
可选地,网络列表指示的多个网络中不包含终端当前接入的网络。Optionally, the multiple networks indicated by the network list do not include a network currently accessed by the terminal.
一种可能的设计方案中,网络列表还指示多个网络支持终端签约的无线接入技术类型。In a possible design, the network list further indicates the types of wireless access technologies subscribed by the terminal supported by the multiple networks.
一种可能的设计方案中,收发模块1401,还用于接收终端的能力信息,处理模块1402,还用于根据终端的能力信息,获取指示信息。终端的能力信息用于指示终端支持多连接。In a possible design, the transceiver module 1401 is further configured to receive capability information of the terminal, and the processing module 1402 is further configured to obtain indication information according to the capability information of the terminal. The capability information of the terminal is used to indicate that the terminal supports multiple connections.
可选地,收发模块1401,还用于在终端注册的过程中,接收来自接入和移动性管理网元的上下文注册请求消息,其中,上下文注册请求消息包括终端的能力信息。Optionally, the transceiver module 1401 is further configured to receive a context registration request message from an access and mobility management network element during terminal registration, wherein the context registration request message includes capability information of the terminal.
一种可能的设计方案中,处理模块1402,还用于元获取终端请求的切片信息,并根据网络切片是多连接的业务对应的切片,获取指示信息。其中,终端请求的切片信息用于指示终端请求的网络切片。In a possible design scheme, the processing module 1402 is also used to obtain the slice information requested by the terminal, and obtain the indication information according to whether the network slice is a slice corresponding to the multi-connected service. The slice information requested by the terminal is used to indicate the network slice requested by the terminal.
可选地,收发模块1401,还用于在终端注册的过程中,接收来自接入和移动性管理网元的上下文注册请求消息。其中,上下文注册请求消息包括终端请求的切片信息。Optionally, the transceiver module 1401 is also used to receive a context registration request message from an access and mobility management network element during the terminal registration process, wherein the context registration request message includes the slice information requested by the terminal.
一种可能的设计方案中,处理模块1402,还用于获取终端的签约数据,并根据终端的签约数据,获取指示信息。其中,终端的签约数据指示终端支持多连接。In a possible design, the processing module 1402 is further configured to obtain the subscription data of the terminal and obtain the indication information according to the subscription data of the terminal, wherein the subscription data of the terminal indicates that the terminal supports multiple connections.
可选地,收发模块1401,还用于在终端注册的过程中,接收来自接入和移动性管理网元的签约数据获取请求消息,处理模块1402,还用于根据签约数据获取请求消息,获取终端的签约数据。其中,签约数据获取请求消息用于请求终端与网络签约的数据。Optionally, the transceiver module 1401 is further configured to receive a subscription data acquisition request message from an access and mobility management network element during terminal registration, and the processing module 1402 is further configured to acquire the subscription data of the terminal according to the subscription data acquisition request message. The subscription data acquisition request message is used to request data signed by the terminal and the network.
一种可能的设计方案中,收发模块1401,还用于接收来自接入和移动性管理网元的业务信息,处理模块1402,还用于根据终端的业务需求未被满足,获取指示信息。其中,业务信息用于指示终端的业务需求未被满足。In a possible design, the transceiver module 1401 is further configured to receive service information from an access and mobility management network element, and the processing module 1402 is further configured to obtain indication information according to the service requirement of the terminal not being met. The service information is used to indicate that the service requirement of the terminal is not met.
可选地,终端的业务需求未被满足包括:为终端提供的带宽无法满足终端的业务对带宽的需求,和/或,终端的信号质量无法满足终端的业务对信号质量的需求,或者还可以有其他任何可能的情况,对此不做限定。Optionally, the unmet service demand of the terminal includes: the bandwidth provided to the terminal cannot meet the bandwidth demand of the terminal's service, and/or the signal quality of the terminal cannot meet the signal quality demand of the terminal's service, or there may be any other possible situations, which are not limited to this.
一种可能的设计方案中,处理模块1402,还用于可以根据预设条件,获取指示信息,其中,预设条件包括如下至少一项:当前在终端需要建立多连接的时间段内、或终端的位置位于终端需要建立多连接的区域内。In one possible design scheme, the processing module 1402 is also used to obtain indication information according to preset conditions, wherein the preset conditions include at least one of the following: the terminal is currently in a time period where multiple connections need to be established, or the terminal is located in an area where the terminal needs to establish multiple connections.
可选地,处理模块1402,还用于可以通过订阅服务从接入和移动性管理网元获取终端的位置。Optionally, the processing module 1402 is further configured to obtain the location of the terminal from an access and mobility management network element through a subscription service.
一种可能的设计方案中,收发模块1401,还用于接收来自终端的请求信息,处理模块1402,还用于根据请求信息,获取指示信息。其中,请求信息用于指示终端请求建立多连接。In a possible design, the transceiver module 1401 is further configured to receive request information from a terminal, and the processing module 1402 is further configured to obtain indication information according to the request information, wherein the request information is used to indicate that the terminal requests to establish multiple connections.
可选地,收发模块1401,还用于接收来自接入和移动性管理网元的签约数据管理获取请求消息,其中,签约数据管理获取请求消息包括请求信息。Optionally, the transceiver module 1401 is further configured to receive a subscription data management acquisition request message from an access and mobility management network element, wherein the subscription data management acquisition request message includes request information.
一种可能的设计方案中,处理模块1402,还用于获取终端的会话对应的切片信息和/或数据网络名称,并根据终端的业务是需要建立多连接的业务,获取指示信息。其中,切片信息和/或数据网络名称与终端的业务对应。In one possible design, processing module 1402 is further used to obtain slice information and/or a data network name corresponding to a session of the terminal, and obtain indication information according to whether the service of the terminal requires the establishment of multiple connections. The slice information and/or the data network name corresponds to the service of the terminal.
可选地,收发模块1401,还用于在终端的会话建立过程中,数据管理网元接收来自会话管理网元的上下文注册请求消息,其中,上下文注册请求消息包括切片信息和/或数据网络名称。Optionally, the transceiver module 1401 is also used for the data management network element to receive a context registration request message from the session management network element during the session establishment process of the terminal, wherein the context registration request message includes slice information and/or data network name.
可选地,收发模块1401可以包括发送模块(图14中未示出)和接收模块(图14中未示出)。其中,发送模块用于实现通信装置1400的发送功能,接收模块用于实现通信装置1400的接收功能。Optionally, the transceiver module 1401 may include a sending module (not shown in FIG. 14 ) and a receiving module (not shown in FIG. 14 ). The sending module is used to implement the sending function of the communication device 1400 , and the receiving module is used to implement the receiving function of the communication device 1400 .
可选地,通信装置1400还可以包括存储模块(图14中未示出),该存储模块存储有程序或指令。当该处理模块1402执行该程序或指令时,使得该通信装置1400可以执行上述图6-图8所示的方法中的功能。Optionally, the communication device 1400 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG. 14 ), which stores a program or instruction. When the processing module 1402 executes the program or instruction, the communication device 1400 may perform the functions in the method shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 8 above.
可以理解,通信装置1400可以是网络设备,也可以是可设置于网络设备中的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件,还可以是包含网络设备的装置,本申请对此不做限定。It can be understood that the communication device 1400 can be a network device, or a chip (system) or other parts or components that can be set in the network device, or a device that includes a network device, which is not limited in this application.
此外,通信装置1400的技术效果可以参考上述的通信方法的技术效果,此处不再赘述。In addition, the technical effects of the communication device 1400 can refer to the technical effects of the above-mentioned communication method, which will not be repeated here.
第二种可能的实施例中,通信装置1400可以适用到上述通信方法中的应用功能网元,实现应用功能网元的功能,具体如下。In a second possible embodiment, the communication device 1400 may be applied to the application function network element in the above communication method to implement the functions of the application function network element, as follows.
收发模块1401,用于接收请求消息,处理模块1402,用于根据请求消息,控制收发模块1401发送响应消息。其中,请求消息用于请求应用功能网元提供能用于建立多连接的网络,多连接是指同时建立多个第三代合作伙伴计划3GPP接入类型的连接,3GPP接入类型的连接属于相同或不同的网络,该响应消息包括网络列表,网络列表指示的多个网络为能用于建立多连接的网络。The transceiver module 1401 is used to receive a request message, and the processing module 1402 is used to control the transceiver module 1401 to send a response message according to the request message. The request message is used to request the application function network element to provide a network that can be used to establish multiple connections. Multiple connections refer to establishing multiple third generation partnership project 3GPP access type connections at the same time. The 3GPP access type connections belong to the same or different networks. The response message includes a network list, and the multiple networks indicated by the network list are networks that can be used to establish multiple connections.
可以理解,应用功能网元具体可以是漫游切换应用功能SOR-AF网元,或者其他任何可能类型的AF网元,对此不做限制。It can be understood that the application function network element may specifically be a roaming handover application function SOR-AF network element, or any other possible type of AF network element, and there is no limitation on this.
一种可能的设计方案中,收发模块1401,还用于接收终端的会话对应切片信息和/或数据网络名称,处理模块1402,还用于根据支持切片信息和/或数据网络名称的多个网络,确定网络列表。In one possible design scheme, the transceiver module 1401 is also used to receive slice information and/or data network name corresponding to the terminal session, and the processing module 1402 is also used to determine the network list based on multiple networks that support slice information and/or data network names.
可选地,网络列表指示的多个网络中不包含终端当前接入的网络。Optionally, the multiple networks indicated by the network list do not include a network currently accessed by the terminal.
可选地,网络列表还指示多个网络支持终端签约的无线接入技术类型。Optionally, the network list further indicates the types of wireless access technologies subscribed by the terminal supported by the multiple networks.
可选地,收发模块1401可以包括发送模块(图14中未示出)和接收模块(图14中未示出)。其中,发送模块用于实现通信装置1400的发送功能,接收模块用于实现通信装置1400的接收功能。Optionally, the transceiver module 1401 may include a sending module (not shown in FIG. 14 ) and a receiving module (not shown in FIG. 14 ). The sending module is used to implement the sending function of the communication device 1400 , and the receiving module is used to implement the receiving function of the communication device 1400 .
可选地,通信装置1400还可以包括存储模块(图14中未示出),该存储模块存储有程序或指令。当该处理模块1402执行该程序或指令时,使得该通信装置1400可以执行上述图6-图8所示的方法中的功能。Optionally, the communication device 1400 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG. 14 ), which stores a program or instruction. When the processing module 1402 executes the program or instruction, the communication device 1400 may perform the functions in the method shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 8 above.
可以理解,通信装置1400可以是网络设备,也可以是可设置于网络设备中的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件,还可以是包含网络设备的装置,本申请对此不做限定。It can be understood that the communication device 1400 can be a network device, or a chip (system) or other parts or components that can be set in the network device, or a device that includes a network device, which is not limited in this application.
此外,通信装置1400的技术效果可以参考上述的通信方法的技术效果,此处不再赘述。In addition, the technical effects of the communication device 1400 can refer to the technical effects of the above-mentioned communication method, which will not be repeated here.
第三种可能的实施例中,通信装置1400可以适用到上述通信方法中的接入和移动性管理网元,实现接入和移动性管理网元的功能,具体如下。In a third possible embodiment, the communication device 1400 may be applied to the access and mobility management network element in the above communication method to implement the functions of the access and mobility management network element, as follows.
处理模块1402,用于控制收发模块1401向数据管理网元发送业务信息,收发模块1401,用于接收数据管理网元根据业务信息的指示信息,并向终端发送指示信息。其中,业务信息指示终端的业务需求未被满足;指示信息用于指示终端需要建立多连接,多连接是指同时建立多个第三代合作伙伴计划3GPP接入类型的连接,3GPP接入类型的连接属于相同或不同的网络。The processing module 1402 is used to control the transceiver module 1401 to send service information to the data management network element. The transceiver module 1401 is used to receive the indication information of the data management network element according to the service information and send the indication information to the terminal. The service information indicates that the service demand of the terminal is not met; the indication information is used to indicate that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, which means that multiple third generation partnership project 3GPP access type connections are established at the same time, and the 3GPP access type connections belong to the same or different networks.
一种可能的设计方案中,收发模块1401,还用于接收来自接入网设备的N2消息,N2消息包括业务信息。处理模块1402,还用于根据业务信息,确定接入网设备无法满足终端对业务的需求。In a possible design, the transceiver module 1401 is further configured to receive an N2 message from an access network device, the N2 message including service information. The processing module 1402 is further configured to determine, based on the service information, that the access network device cannot meet the service requirements of the terminal.
可选地,处理模块1402,还用于根据终端位于低信号的区域,获取业务信息。其中,业务信息具体用于指示终端的信号质量无法满足终端的业务对信号质量的需求。Optionally, the processing module 1402 is further configured to obtain service information according to the terminal being located in a low signal area, wherein the service information is specifically used to indicate that the signal quality of the terminal cannot meet the signal quality requirement of the service of the terminal.
可选地,收发模块1401可以包括发送模块(图14中未示出)和接收模块(图14中未示出)。其中,发送模块用于实现通信装置1400的发送功能,接收模块用于实现通信装置1400的接收功能。Optionally, the transceiver module 1401 may include a sending module (not shown in FIG. 14 ) and a receiving module (not shown in FIG. 14 ). The sending module is used to implement the sending function of the communication device 1400 , and the receiving module is used to implement the receiving function of the communication device 1400 .
可选地,通信装置1400还可以包括存储模块(图14中未示出),该存储模块存储有程序或指令。当该处理模块1402执行该程序或指令时,使得该通信装置1400可以执行上述图6-图8所示的方法中的功能。Optionally, the communication device 1400 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG. 14 ), which stores a program or instruction. When the processing module 1402 executes the program or instruction, the communication device 1400 may perform the functions in the method shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 8 above.
可以理解,通信装置1400可以是网络设备,也可以是可设置于网络设备中的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件,还可以是包含网络设备的装置,本申请对此不做限定。It can be understood that the communication device 1400 can be a network device, or a chip (system) or other parts or components that can be set in the network device, or a device that includes a network device, which is not limited in this application.
此外,通信装置1400的技术效果可以参考上述的通信方法的技术效果,此处不再赘述。In addition, the technical effects of the communication device 1400 can refer to the technical effects of the above-mentioned communication method, which will not be repeated here.
第四种可能的实施例中,通信装置1400可以适用到上述通信方法中终端的模块(例如处理器、芯片、或芯片系统等)执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分终端功能的逻辑节点、逻辑模块或软件实现。为方便表述,下文以该方法由终端执行为例进行介绍。In a fourth possible embodiment, the communication device 1400 may be applicable to the module (such as a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) of the terminal in the above communication method, and may also be implemented by a logical node, a logical module, or software that can implement all or part of the terminal functions. For the convenience of description, the following description takes the method executed by the terminal as an example.
收发模块1401,用于接收指示信息,处理模块1402,用于根据指示信息,建立多连接。其中,指示信息用于指示终端需要建立多连接,多连接是指同时建立多个第三代合作伙伴计划3GPP接入类型的连接,3GPP接入类型的连接属于相同或不同的网络。The transceiver module 1401 is used to receive the indication information, and the processing module 1402 is used to establish multiple connections according to the indication information. The indication information is used to indicate that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, and the multiple connections refer to establishing multiple third generation partnership project 3GPP access type connections at the same time, and the 3GPP access type connections belong to the same or different networks.
一种可能的设计方案中,终端已与第一网络建立3GPP接入类型的连接,处理模块1402还用于根据指示信息,从网络列表指示的多个网络中选择第二网络,并与第二网络建立3GPP接入类型的连接。网络列表指示的多个网络为能用于建立多连接的网络。In one possible design, the terminal has established a 3GPP access type connection with the first network, and the processing module 1402 is further configured to select a second network from multiple networks indicated by the network list according to the indication information, and establish a 3GPP access type connection with the second network. The multiple networks indicated by the network list are networks that can be used to establish multiple connections.
可选地,网络列表指示的多个网络中不包含第一网络。Optionally, the multiple networks indicated by the network list do not include the first network.
可选地,网络列表还指示多个网络支持终端签约的无线接入技术类型。Optionally, the network list further indicates the types of wireless access technologies subscribed by the terminal supported by the multiple networks.
可选地,指示信息还用于指示网络列表。Optionally, the indication information is also used to indicate a network list.
一种可能的设计方案中,收发模块1401,还用于发送终端的能力信息,其中,终端的能力信息用于指示终端支持多连接。In a possible design scheme, the transceiver module 1401 is further used to send capability information of the terminal, wherein the capability information of the terminal is used to indicate that the terminal supports multiple connections.
一种可能的设计方案中,收发模块1401,还用于发送终端的会话对应的切片信息和/或数据网络名称。其中,切片信息和/或数据网络名称与终端的业务对应,且终端的业务是需要建立多连接的业务。In a possible design, the transceiver module 1401 is also used to send the slice information and/or data network name corresponding to the session of the terminal. The slice information and/or data network name corresponds to the service of the terminal, and the service of the terminal is a service that requires establishing multiple connections.
一种可能的设计方案中,收发模块1401,还用于在终端需要建立多连接的情况下,发送请求信息,其中,请求信息用于指示终端请求建立多连接。In a possible design scheme, the transceiver module 1401 is further used to send request information when the terminal needs to establish multiple connections, wherein the request information is used to indicate that the terminal requests to establish multiple connections.
一种可能的设计方案中,处理模块1402,还用于响应于用户开启多连接的操作,确定终端需要建立多连接;或者;处理模块1402,还用于在终端的业务需要被执行情况下,获取与终端的业务匹配的策略信息;在策略信息指示需要建立多连接的情况下,确定终端需要建立多连接。In one possible design scheme, the processing module 1402 is also used to determine that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections in response to the user's operation of starting multiple connections; or; the processing module 1402 is also used to obtain policy information matching the terminal's business when the terminal's business needs to be executed; when the policy information indicates that multiple connections need to be established, determine that the terminal needs to establish multiple connections.
可选地,收发模块1401可以包括发送模块(图14中未示出)和接收模块(图14中未示出)。其中,发送模块用于实现通信装置1400的发送功能,接收模块用于实现通信装置1400的接收功能。Optionally, the transceiver module 1401 may include a sending module (not shown in FIG. 14 ) and a receiving module (not shown in FIG. 14 ). The sending module is used to implement the sending function of the communication device 1400 , and the receiving module is used to implement the receiving function of the communication device 1400 .
可选地,通信装置1400还可以包括存储模块(图14中未示出),该存储模块存储有程序或指令。当该处理模块1402执行该程序或指令时,使得该通信装置1400可以执行上述图6-图8所示的方法中的功能。Optionally, the communication device 1400 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG. 14 ), which stores a program or instruction. When the processing module 1402 executes the program or instruction, the communication device 1400 may perform the functions in the method shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 8 above.
可以理解,通信装置1400可以是终端,也可以是可设置于终端中的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件,还可以是包含终端的装置,本申请对此不做限定。It can be understood that the communication device 1400 can be a terminal, or a chip (system) or other parts or components that can be set in the terminal, or a device including a terminal, which is not limited in this application.
此外,通信装置1400的技术效果可以参考上述的通信方法的技术效果,此处不再赘述。In addition, the technical effects of the communication device 1400 can refer to the technical effects of the above-mentioned communication method, which will not be repeated here.
第五种可能的实施例中,通信装置1400可以适用到上述通信方法中终端的模块(例如处理器、芯片、或芯片系统等)执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分终端功能的逻辑节点、逻辑模块或软件实现。为方便表述,下文以该方法由终端执行为例进行介绍。In a fifth possible embodiment, the communication device 1400 may be applicable to the module (such as a processor, a chip, or a chip system, etc.) of the terminal in the above communication method, and may also be implemented by a logical node, a logical module, or software that can implement all or part of the terminal functions. For the convenience of description, the following is an example of the method being executed by the terminal.
处理模块1402,用于在终端的业务需要被执行情况下,获取与终端的业务匹配的策略信息;若策略信息指示需要建立多连接,则控制收发模块1401建立多连接,其中,多连接是指同时建立第三代合作伙伴计划3GPP接入类型的连接,3GPP接入类型的连接属于相同或不同的网络。The processing module 1402 is used to obtain policy information matching the terminal's business when the terminal's business needs to be executed; if the policy information indicates that multiple connections need to be established, the transceiver module 1401 is controlled to establish multiple connections, wherein multiple connections refer to simultaneously establishing connections of the Third Generation Partnership Project 3GPP access type, and the 3GPP access type connections belong to the same or different networks.
一种可能的设计方案中,终端已与第一网络建立3GPP接入类型的连接,处理模块1402,用于从网络列表指示的多个网络中选择第二网络,并控制收发模块1401与第二网络建立3GPP接入类型的连接。其中,网络列表由策略信息指示,网络列表指示的多个网络为能用于建立多连接的网络。In one possible design, the terminal has established a 3GPP access type connection with the first network, and the processing module 1402 is used to select a second network from multiple networks indicated by the network list, and control the transceiver module 1401 to establish a 3GPP access type connection with the second network. The network list is indicated by policy information, and the multiple networks indicated by the network list are networks that can be used to establish multiple connections.
一种可能的设计方案中,收发模块1401,还用于从网络接收策略信息。In a possible design, transceiver module 1401 is further configured to receive policy information from a network.
可选地,收发模块1401可以包括发送模块(图14中未示出)和接收模块(图14中未示出)。其中,发送模块用于实现通信装置1400的发送功能,接收模块用于实现通信装置1400的接收功能。Optionally, the transceiver module 1401 may include a sending module (not shown in FIG. 14 ) and a receiving module (not shown in FIG. 14 ). The sending module is used to implement the sending function of the communication device 1400 , and the receiving module is used to implement the receiving function of the communication device 1400 .
可选地,通信装置1400还可以包括存储模块(图14中未示出),该存储模块存储有程序或指令。当该处理模块1402执行该程序或指令时,使得该通信装置1400可以执行上述图6-图8所示的方法中的功能。Optionally, the communication device 1400 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG. 14 ), which stores a program or instruction. When the processing module 1402 executes the program or instruction, the communication device 1400 may perform the functions in the method shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 8 above.
可以理解,通信装置1400可以是终端,也可以是可设置于终端中的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件,还可以是包含终端的装置,本申请对此不做限定。It can be understood that the communication device 1400 can be a terminal, or a chip (system) or other parts or components that can be set in the terminal, or a device including a terminal, which is not limited in this application.
此外,通信装置1400的技术效果可以参考上述的通信方法的技术效果,此处不再赘述。In addition, the technical effects of the communication device 1400 can refer to the technical effects of the above-mentioned communication method, which will not be repeated here.
第六种可能的实施例中,通信装置1400可以适用到上述通信方法中的策略控制网元,实现策略控制网元的功能,具体如下。In a sixth possible embodiment, the communication device 1400 may be applied to the policy control network element in the above communication method to implement the functions of the policy control network element, as follows.
处理模块1402,用于在终端的策略信息需要更新的情况下,获取终端的新的策略信息,收发模块1401,用于向终端发送新的策略信息。其中,策略信息用于指示需要建立多连接,多连接是指同时建立多个第三代合作伙伴计划3GPP接入类型的连接,3GPP接入类型的连接属于相同或不同的网络。也即,通过更新策略信息,使得终端能够具备建立多连接的能力。The processing module 1402 is used to obtain new policy information of the terminal when the policy information of the terminal needs to be updated, and the transceiver module 1401 is used to send new policy information to the terminal. The policy information is used to indicate that multiple connections need to be established. Multiple connections refer to establishing multiple third generation partnership project 3GPP access type connections at the same time. The 3GPP access type connections belong to the same or different networks. That is, by updating the policy information, the terminal can have the ability to establish multiple connections.
一种可能的设计方案中,新的策略信息还指示建立多连接所需的无线接入技术类型组合。In a possible design, the new policy information further indicates a combination of radio access technology types required to establish multiple connections.
可选地,收发模块1401可以包括发送模块(图14中未示出)和接收模块(图14中未示出)。其中,发送模块用于实现通信装置1400的发送功能,接收模块用于实现通信装置1400的接收功能。Optionally, the transceiver module 1401 may include a sending module (not shown in FIG. 14 ) and a receiving module (not shown in FIG. 14 ). The sending module is used to implement the sending function of the communication device 1400 , and the receiving module is used to implement the receiving function of the communication device 1400 .
可选地,通信装置1400还可以包括存储模块(图14中未示出),该存储模块存储有程序或指令。当该处理模块1402执行该程序或指令时,使得该通信装置1400可以执行上述图6-图8所示的方法中的功能。Optionally, the communication device 1400 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG. 14 ), which stores a program or instruction. When the processing module 1402 executes the program or instruction, the communication device 1400 may perform the functions in the method shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 8 above.
可以理解,通信装置1400可以是网络设备,也可以是可设置于网络设备中的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件,还可以是包含网络设备的装置,本申请对此不做限定。It can be understood that the communication device 1400 can be a network device, or a chip (system) or other parts or components that can be set in the network device, or a device that includes a network device, which is not limited in this application.
此外,通信装置1400的技术效果可以参考上述的通信方法的技术效果,此处不再赘述。In addition, the technical effects of the communication device 1400 can refer to the technical effects of the above-mentioned communication method, which will not be repeated here.
图15为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的结构示意图二。示例性地,该通信装置可以是终端,也可以是可设置于终端的芯片(系统)或其他部件或组件。如图15所示,通信装置1500可以包括处理器1501。可选地,通信装置1500还可以包括存储器1502和/或收发器1503。其中,处理器1501与存储器1502和收发器1503耦合,如可以通过通信总线连接。FIG15 is a second schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application. Exemplarily, the communication device may be a terminal, or a chip (system) or other component or assembly that may be provided in a terminal. As shown in FIG15 , a communication device 1500 may include a processor 1501. Optionally, the communication device 1500 may further include a memory 1502 and/or a transceiver 1503. The processor 1501 is coupled to the memory 1502 and the transceiver 1503, such as by a communication bus.
下面结合图15对通信装置1500的各个构成部件进行具体的介绍:The following is a detailed introduction to the various components of the communication device 1500 in conjunction with FIG15 :
其中,处理器1501是通信装置1500的控制中心,可以是一个处理器,也可以是多个处理元件的统称。例如,处理器1501是一个或多个中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),也可以是特定集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),或者是被配置成实施本申请实施例的一个或多个集成电路,例如:一个或多个微处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),或,一个或者多个现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)。The processor 1501 is the control center of the communication device 1500, which can be a processor or a general term for multiple processing elements. For example, the processor 1501 is one or more central processing units (CPUs), or an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the embodiments of the present application, such as one or more microprocessors (digital signal processors, DSPs), or one or more field programmable gate arrays (field programmable gate arrays, FPGAs).
可选地,处理器1501可以通过运行或执行存储在存储器1502内的软件程序,以及调用存储在存储器1502内的数据,执行通信装置1500的各种功能,例如执行上述图8-图13所示的通信方法。Optionally, the processor 1501 can execute various functions of the communication device 1500 by running or executing a software program stored in the memory 1502 and calling data stored in the memory 1502, such as executing the communication method shown in Figures 8 to 13 above.
在具体的实现中,作为一种实施例,处理器1501可以包括一个或多个CPU,例如图15中所示出的CPU0和CPU1。In a specific implementation, as an embodiment, the processor 1501 may include one or more CPUs, such as CPU0 and CPU1 shown in FIG. 15 .
在具体实现中,作为一种实施例,通信装置1500也可以包括多个处理器,例如图15中所示的处理器1501和处理器1504。这些处理器中的每一个可以是一个单核处理器(single-CPU),也可以是一个多核处理器(multi-CPU)。这里的处理器可以指一个或多个设备、电路、和/或用于处理数据(例如计算机程序指令)的处理核。In a specific implementation, as an embodiment, the communication device 1500 may also include multiple processors, such as the processor 1501 and the processor 1504 shown in FIG15. Each of these processors may be a single-core processor (single-CPU) or a multi-core processor (multi-CPU). The processor here may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data (e.g., computer program instructions).
其中,所述存储器1502用于存储执行本申请方案的软件程序,并由处理器1501来控制执行,具体实现方式可以参考上述方法实施例,此处不再赘述。The memory 1502 is used to store the software program for executing the solution of the present application, and the execution is controlled by the processor 1501. The specific implementation method can refer to the above method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
可选地,存储器1502可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)或者可存储信息和指令的其他类型的动态存储设备,也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory,EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质,但不限于此。存储器1502可以和处理器1501集成在一起,也可以独立存在,并通过通信装置1500的接口电路(图15中未示出)与处理器1501耦合,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Optionally, the memory 1502 may be a read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, a random access memory (RAM) or other types of dynamic storage devices that can store information and instructions, or an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), a compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or other optical disc storage, optical disc storage (including compressed optical disc, laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc, Blu-ray disc, etc.), a magnetic disk storage medium or other magnetic storage device, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store the desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited thereto. The memory 1502 may be integrated with the processor 1501, or may exist independently and be coupled to the processor 1501 through an interface circuit (not shown in FIG. 15 ) of the communication device 1500, which is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
收发器1503,用于与其他通信装置之间的通信。例如,通信装置1500为终端,收发器1503可以用于与网络设备通信,或者与另一个终端设备通信。又例如,通信装置1500为网络设备,收发器1503可以用于与终端通信,或者与另一个网络设备通信。The transceiver 1503 is used for communication with other communication devices. For example, if the communication device 1500 is a terminal, the transceiver 1503 can be used to communicate with a network device, or with another terminal device. For another example, if the communication device 1500 is a network device, the transceiver 1503 can be used to communicate with a terminal, or with another network device.
可选地,收发器1503可以包括接收器和发送器(图15中未单独示出)。其中,接收器用于实现接收功能,发送器用于实现发送功能。Optionally, the transceiver 1503 may include a receiver and a transmitter (not shown separately in FIG. 15 ), wherein the receiver is used to implement a receiving function, and the transmitter is used to implement a sending function.
可选地,收发器1503可以和处理器1501集成在一起,也可以独立存在,并通过通信装置1500的接口电路(图15中未示出)与处理器1501耦合,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Optionally, the transceiver 1503 may be integrated with the processor 1501, or may exist independently and be coupled to the processor 1501 via an interface circuit (not shown in FIG. 15 ) of the communication device 1500 , which is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
可以理解的是,图15中示出的通信装置1500的结构并不构成对该通信装置的限定,实际的通信装置可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。It is understandable that the structure of the communication device 1500 shown in FIG. 15 does not constitute a limitation on the communication device, and an actual communication device may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or a combination of certain components, or a different arrangement of components.
此外,通信装置1500的技术效果可以参考上述方法实施例所述的方法的技术效果,此处不再赘述。In addition, the technical effects of the communication device 1500 can refer to the technical effects of the method described in the above method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
应理解,在本申请实施例中的处理器可以是中央处理单元(central processing unit,CPU),该处理器还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。It should be understood that the processor in the embodiments of the present application may be a central processing unit (CPU), and the processor may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSP), application-specific integrated circuits (ASIC), field programmable gate arrays (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor, etc.
还应理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(doubledata rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。It should also be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memories. Among them, the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), or a flash memory. The volatile memory may be a random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of example and not limitation, many forms of random access memory (RAM) are available, such as static RAM (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous DRAM (SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (ESDRAM), synchronous link DRAM (SLDRAM), and direct rambus RAM (DR RAM).
上述实施例,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件(如电路)、固件或其他任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,上述实施例可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令或计算机程序。在计算机上加载或执行所述计算机指令或计算机程序时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以为通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集合的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质。半导体介质可以是固态硬盘。The above embodiments can be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware (such as circuits), firmware or any other combination. When implemented using software, the above embodiments can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions or computer programs. When the computer instructions or computer programs are loaded or executed on a computer, the process or function described in the embodiment of the present application is generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions can be transmitted from one website site, computer, server or data center to another website site, computer, server or data center by wired (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that a computer can access or a data storage device such as a server or data center that contains one or more available media sets. The available medium can be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium. The semiconductor medium can be a solid-state hard disk.
应理解,本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系,但也可能表示的是一种“和/或”的关系,具体可参考前后文进行理解。It should be understood that the term "and/or" in this article is only a description of the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships. For example, A and/or B can represent: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. A and B can be singular or plural. In addition, the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or" relationship, but it may also indicate an "and/or" relationship. Please refer to the context for specific understanding.
本申请中,“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b,或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。In this application, "at least one" means one or more, and "plurality" means two or more. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items. For example, at least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, c can be single or multiple.
应理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that in the various embodiments of the present application, the size of the serial numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution. The execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Professional and technical personnel can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of description, the specific working processes of the systems, devices and units described above can refer to the corresponding processes in the aforementioned method embodiments and will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in the present application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application can be essentially or partly embodied in the form of a software product that contributes to the prior art. The computer software product is stored in a storage medium and includes several instructions for a computer device (which can be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in each embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), disk or optical disk, and other media that can store program codes.
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above is only a specific implementation of the present application, but the protection scope of the present application is not limited thereto. Any person skilled in the art who is familiar with the present technical field can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in the present application, which should be included in the protection scope of the present application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application should be based on the protection scope of the claims.
Claims (30)
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN202410026771.1 | 2024-01-05 | ||
| CN202410026771.1A CN120282221A (en) | 2024-01-05 | 2024-01-05 | Communication method and device |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2025146043A1 true WO2025146043A1 (en) | 2025-07-10 |
Family
ID=96242286
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2024/144377 Pending WO2025146043A1 (en) | 2024-01-05 | 2024-12-31 | Communication method and apparatus |
Country Status (2)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| CN (1) | CN120282221A (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2025146043A1 (en) |
Citations (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20230108625A1 (en) * | 2021-09-27 | 2023-04-06 | Cable Television Laboratories, Inc. | Enhanced multi-access protocol data unit (pdu) session |
| WO2023185772A1 (en) * | 2022-03-28 | 2023-10-05 | 华为技术有限公司 | Communication method and apparatus |
| WO2023197789A1 (en) * | 2022-04-13 | 2023-10-19 | 华为技术有限公司 | Communication method and communication device |
-
2024
- 2024-01-05 CN CN202410026771.1A patent/CN120282221A/en active Pending
- 2024-12-31 WO PCT/CN2024/144377 patent/WO2025146043A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20230108625A1 (en) * | 2021-09-27 | 2023-04-06 | Cable Television Laboratories, Inc. | Enhanced multi-access protocol data unit (pdu) session |
| WO2023185772A1 (en) * | 2022-03-28 | 2023-10-05 | 华为技术有限公司 | Communication method and apparatus |
| WO2023197789A1 (en) * | 2022-04-13 | 2023-10-19 | 华为技术有限公司 | Communication method and communication device |
Non-Patent Citations (1)
| Title |
|---|
| TENCENT: "KI #3, New Sol: Network Information Exposure to Local AF with Low Latency", 3GPP DRAFT; S2-2003707, vol. SA WG2, 22 May 2020 (2020-05-22), pages 1 - 4, XP051889749 * |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| CN120282221A (en) | 2025-07-08 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| EP3695653B1 (en) | Ue configuration and update with network slice selection policy | |
| US20220174580A1 (en) | Method of registration with access and mobility management function re-allocation | |
| US20190182875A1 (en) | User Plane Function Selection For Isolated Network Slice | |
| JP7632695B2 (en) | User device, user device method, communication device, and communication device method | |
| US12238810B2 (en) | Communications method, apparatus, and system | |
| KR20210024160A (en) | Communication method and device | |
| EP3833072B1 (en) | Local area network communication management method and apparatus | |
| KR20210010562A (en) | Rate control method, apparatus, and system | |
| US20250203448A1 (en) | Communication resource management method, apparatus, system, and storage medium | |
| WO2021030946A1 (en) | A method of registration with access and mobility management function re-allocation | |
| CN114423074A (en) | Communication method and device | |
| WO2021098073A1 (en) | Registration with accessibility and mobility management function re-allocation | |
| CN113747605B (en) | Communication method and communication device | |
| CN117221884A (en) | Base station system information management method and system | |
| CN116321328A (en) | Method and device for session switching | |
| CN115996378A (en) | Authentication method and device | |
| WO2025146043A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| WO2025146035A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| WO2022214094A1 (en) | Network handover method and apparatus | |
| KR20220163439A (en) | Initiate network request registration process | |
| US20250392953A1 (en) | Congestion control event notification method and device in wireless communication system | |
| WO2025171757A1 (en) | Communication method and communication apparatus | |
| WO2025201338A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| CN120730396A (en) | A communication method | |
| WO2024140620A1 (en) | Communication method, device and system |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 24915257 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |